Chevrolet | Cobalt 2005 | Specifications | Chevrolet Cobalt 2005 Specifications

2009 Chevrolet Cobalt Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint System ............................. 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-9
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-10
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-30
Airbag System
......................................... 1-54
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-74
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-8
Windows ................................................. 2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-20
Mirrors .................................................... 2-37
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-39
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-42
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-43
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-18
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-23
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-43
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-58
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle
....... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-32
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-44
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-46
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-53
Tires
...................................................... 5-54
Appearance Care
................................... 5-110
Vehicle Identification
............................... 5-117
Electrical System
.................................... 5-117
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-124
.....................................
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-16
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
........... 7-18
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and
the name COBALT are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes after
that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it appears
in this manual.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle.
Index
Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about
the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,
and words work together to explain vehicle operation.
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25776709 B Second Printing
ii
©
2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do
this,” or “Do not let this
happen.”
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
{ CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
*:
This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
iii
Vehicle Symbol Chart
.:
Fuel Gage
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
+:
Fuses
9:
Airbag Readiness Light
#:
Air Conditioning
!:
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g:
Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$:
Brake System Warning Light
":
I:
Charging System
Cruise Control
B:
Engine Coolant Temperature
O:
Exterior Lamps
#:
Fog Lamps
iv
i:
j:
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
LATCH System Child Restraints
*:
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
::
Oil Pressure
}:
Power
/:
Remote Vehicle Start
>:
Safety Belt Reminders
7:
Tire Pressure Monitor
F:
Traction Control
M:
Windshield Washer Fluid
Section 1
Seats and Restraint System
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Seat Height Adjuster .......................................1-3
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-3
Heated Seats .................................................1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-7
Easy Entry Seat (Coupe) .................................1-8
Rear Seats .......................................................1-9
Split Folding Rear Seat ...................................1-9
Safety Belts ...................................................1-10
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-10
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-24
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-29
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-30
Child Restraints .............................................1-30
Older Children ..............................................1-30
Infants and Young Children ............................1-33
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-37
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-40
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) ......................................1-41
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ....................................1-47
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ............................1-50
Airbag System ...............................................1-54
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-56
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-58
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-59
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-59
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-60
Passenger Sensing System
(Without Turbo Engine) ..............................1-61
Passenger Sensing System
(With Turbo Engine) ...................................1-67
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-72
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-73
Restraint System Check ..................................1-74
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-74
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-75
1-1
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{ CAUTION:
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
1-2
Seat Height Adjuster
Manual Lumbar
On vehicles with this
feature, the knob is
located on the front of the
driver seat lower cushion
on the inboard side.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the lumbar support.
The driver’s seat height adjuster is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
To raise the seat, move the lever upward repeatedly
until the seat is at the desired height. To lower the seat,
move the lever downward repeatedly until the seat is
at the desired height.
1-3
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have heated front seats. The switches
are located on the instrument panel above the climate
control system.
Press the side of the
switch with the double
indicator lights to turn on
the heated seat at the
highest setting.
Driver’s Switch Shown,
Passenger’s Switch
Similar
Both indicator lights will be lit to indicate that the
setting is on high. Press the side of the switch with
the single indicator light to go to the low setting.
1-4
The indicator light will be lit to indicate that the setting is
on low. Return the switch to the center to turn off the
heated seat.
If your vehicle has been turned off, the last heated seat
setting will be retained when the vehicle is started again.
Reclining Seatbacks
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side
of the seats.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-5
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up,
the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-6
Head Restraints
Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. To lower
the head restraint,
press the button,
located on the top of
the seatback, and push
the restraint down.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
1-7
Easy Entry Seat (Coupe)
To use the easy entry seat, do the following:
{ CAUTION:
If the easy entry right front seat is not locked, it
can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the person
sitting there could be injured. After you have used
it, be sure to push rearward on an easy entry seat
to be sure it is locked.
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
The front passenger seat can be used to easily get in
and out of the rear seat.
1-8
1. Push down the easy entry seat handle located on
the rear of the seatback on the outboard side to
release the seatback.
2. Tilt the seatback forward completely while pushing
the seat forward.
3. Move the seat rearward until it locks into place after
someone gets into the rear seat area.
4. Move the seatback to its original position and make
sure the seatback is locked.
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
You can fold either side of the rear seatback down for
more cargo space.
To lower the rear seatback, follow these steps:
2. Push the seatback open through the trunk, or pull it
down from inside the vehicle.
To raise the rear seatback, lift it up and push rearward
until you hear a click. Push and pull on the seatback
to be sure it is locked into place.
{ CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
pull forward on the top of the seatback at the area
of the latch to be sure it is locked.
{ CAUTION:
1. Open the trunk and pull one or both of the small
handles located in the center of the trunk.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety
belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return
them to their normal stowed position before folding a
rear seat.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached, and are
not twisted.
1-9
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
1-10
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people
to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-25
for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-11
Put someone on it.
1-12
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-13
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-14
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be
riding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-30
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-33.
Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
1-15
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor
in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
1-16
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not on the pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt.
The belt force would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt
goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-22
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted,
make it straight so it can work properly, or ask
your dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-23
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature
may affect the passenger sensing system.
See Passenger Sensing System (Without Turbo
Engine) on page 1-61 or Passenger Sensing
System (With Turbo Engine) on page 1-67 for
more information.
1. If the seat has a safety belt guide, and the safety
belt is not routed through the guide, slide the edge
of the belt webbing through the opening on the
guide. Be sure the belt is not twisted.
2. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-24
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-30.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly if necessary.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
5. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move
it to the height that is right for you. See “Shoulder
Belt Height Adjustment” later in this section for
instructions on use and important safety information.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of
the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the belt and the vehicle.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
1-25
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
(Sedan Only)
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Press the release
button (A) and move
the height adjuster to
the desired position.
The adjuster can be moved
up by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle
has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can
help tighten the safety belts in a side crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 1-75.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
After the height adjuster is set to the desired position,
try to move it down without pressing the release
button to make sure it has locked into position.
1-26
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-27
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-28
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so the safety belt can be removed
from the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its
storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip.
Turn the guide and clip inward and slide them in
between the seatback and the interior body, leaving
only the loop of the elastic cord exposed.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-29
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit.
The extender has been designed for adults. Never use
it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-30
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 1-24 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
• If you have the choice, a child should sit in a
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-24.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
position with a lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-31
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-32
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor
its airbag system is designed for them. Every time
infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should
have the protection provided by appropriate child
restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
1-33
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-34
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
1-35
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-36
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with the
rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
1-37
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-38
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-41 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
1-39
Where to Put the Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a
child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
CAUTION:
1-40
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System (Without Turbo
Engine) on page 1-61 or Passenger Sensing
System (With Turbo Engine) on page 1-67 for
additional information.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this
vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and
its attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-41
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-42
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Each rear seating position has two exposed metal lower
anchors in the crease between the seatback and the
seat cushion.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on
the cover.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
Rear Seat
1-43
The top tether anchors are located under the covers
on the rear seatback filler panel. Open the cover to
access the anchor. Be sure to use an anchor located on
the same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-40 for
additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure
the restraint, following the instructions that came
with the child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
1-44
{ CAUTION:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor
or attachment to come loose or even break during
a crash. A child or others could be injured.
To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only one child restraint
per anchor.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-45
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Open the top tether anchor cover to expose
the anchor.
2.3. If you have an adjustable headrest or head
restraint, raise the headrest or head restraint.
2.4. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
1-46
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, raise the
headrest or head restraint
and route the tether
under the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
If the position you are
using has a fixed or
adjustable headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether,
route the tether around
the headrest or head
restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 1-41 for how to install your child restraint
using LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41 for
top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
1-47
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-40.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-48
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed
the shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may
find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41
for more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-49
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
If your seat has a safety belt guide, return the safety
belt into the guide on the seatback by sliding the
webbing through the opening on the guide.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
The vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System and Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator for more information on this, including
important safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
1-50
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System (Without Turbo
Engine) on page 1-61 or Passenger Sensing
System (With Turbo Engine) on page 1-67 for
additional information.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) for how
and where to install the child restraint using LATCH.
If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH) for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. If the seat has a safety belt guide, remove the
safety belt from the guide on the head restraint
by sliding the webbing through the opening on the
guide. Do not secure the child restraint with the
safety belt routed through the guide.
4. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-51
5. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-52
6. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and on indicator is
lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint”
under Passenger Sensing System (Without Turbo
Engine) on page 1-61 or Passenger Sensing System
(With Turbo Engine) on page 1-67 for more information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If your seat has a safety belt guide, insert the safety belt
into the guide on the head restraint by sliding the
webbing through the opening on the guide.
7. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-53
Airbag System
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
The vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger
Your vehicle may also have the following airbags:
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
1-54
{ CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only restraint.
See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-58.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the blink
of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to
the airbag, as you would be if you were sitting on
the edge of your seat or leaning forward. Safety
belts help keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on page 1-30 or
Infants and Young Children on page 1-33.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
roof-rail airbags.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-26
for more information.
1-55
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-56
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do,
the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-57
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
1-58
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has an electronic frontal
sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Your vehicle may have roof-rail airbags. See Airbag
System on page 1-54. Roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. Roof-rail
airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the
system’s designed threshold level. The threshold level
can vary with specific vehicle design.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.
A roof-rail airbag is intended to deploy on the side of
the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity
of the side impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends
an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing
the bag to break out of the cover and deploy.
The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all
part of the airbag module.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 1-58 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles
with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the
ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows that
have occupant seating positions.
1-59
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate,
so quickly that some people may not even realize
an airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at
least partially inflated for some time after they deploy.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-59.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
1-60
{ CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the
hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
Passenger Sensing System
(Without Turbo Engine)
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when the vehicle is started.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 7-18 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-18.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-27.
1-61
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag and roof-rail airbags are not affected
by the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
1-62
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a child restraint.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
For some children, including children in child restraints,
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-27.
The passenger sensing system is designed turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-26
for more information, including important safety
information.
1-63
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-50.
1-64
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback
and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make
sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing
the child restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-7.
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system may or may not
turn off the airbag for a child in a child restraint
depending upon the child’s seating posture
and body build. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
1-65
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and
“Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for
your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-73 for more
information about modifications that can affect how
the system operates.
A wet seat can affect the performance of the passenger
sensing system. Here is how:
• The passenger sensing system may turn off the
passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into the
seat. If this happens, the off indicator will be lit,
and the airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel will also be lit.
1-66
• Liquid pooled on the seat that has not soaked in
may make it more likely that the passenger
sensing system will enable (turn on) the passenger
airbag while a child restraint or child occupant is
on the seat. If the passenger airbag is turned on,
the on indicator will be lit.
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry the seat immediately.
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do not install a child
restraint or allow anyone to occupy the seat. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 3-26 for important safety
information.
The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat.
If this is not desired, remove the object from the seat.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
Passenger Sensing System
(With Turbo Engine)
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when the vehicle is started.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag and roof-rail airbags are not affected
by the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check.
When the system check is complete, either the word
ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or off,
will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 3-27.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
1-67
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
CAUTION:
1-68
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-27.
{ CAUTION:
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
on (may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-26
for more information, including important safety
information.
1-69
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-50.
1-70
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback
and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make
sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing
the child restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-7.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child restraint
in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and check
with your dealer/retailer.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
1-71
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-17.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for
your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-73 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
1-72
{ CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates.
Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably
part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag system.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric,
could also interfere with the operation of the
passenger sensing system. This could either
prevent proper deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing System (Without Turbo
Engine) on page 1-61 or Passenger Sensing
System (With Turbo Engine) on page 1-67.
If you have any questions, call Customer
Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
1-73
Restraint System Check
Airbags
Checking the Restraint Systems
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-26 for more information.
Safety Belts
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you
in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-25 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 5-112.
1-74
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have the
airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see What
Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-59. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{ CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was
being used during a crash, you may need new
LATCH system parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if
the safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped),
was not being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-26.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
1-75
✍ NOTES
1-76
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ...................................................2-4
Remote Vehicle Start ......................................2-6
Doors and Locks .............................................2-8
Door Locks ....................................................2-8
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9
Delayed Locking ...........................................2-10
Automatic Door Lock .....................................2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .............2-10
Rear Door Security Locks (Sedan) ..................2-11
Lockout Protection ........................................2-11
Trunk ..........................................................2-12
Windows ........................................................2-14
Manual Windows ..........................................2-15
Power Windows ............................................2-15
Sun Visors ...................................................2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-16
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-16
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer .............2-18
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation .................................................2-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-20
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-20
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-20
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-23
Starting the Engine .......................................2-23
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-25
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-26
Manual Transmission Operation ......................2-28
Parking Brake ..............................................2-31
Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) ......2-32
Shifting Out of Park (Automatic Transmission) ...2-33
Parking the Vehicle (Manual Transmission) .......2-34
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-34
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-35
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-36
Mirrors ...........................................................2-37
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-37
Outside Manual Mirror ...................................2-37
Outside Remote Control Mirror .......................2-37
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-38
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-38
OnStar® System .............................................2-39
Storage Areas ................................................2-42
Glove Box ...................................................2-42
Cupholders ..................................................2-42
Center Console Storage .................................2-42
Driver Storage Compartment ..........................2-42
Convenience Net ..........................................2-42
Sunroof .........................................................2-43
2-1
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-8.
2-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to
the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly,
see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
for service.
2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press to start the engine from outside the
vehicle. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-6.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
Q (Lock):
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-3.
Press to lock all the doors. The interior
lamps turn off after all of the doors are closed. If enabled
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the remote
lock feedback can be programmed to have the horn
chirp and/or the turn signals flash to confirm locking.
See “LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-52.
Pressing Q may also arm the content theft-deterrent
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-16.
With Remote Start
Shown, Without Remote
Start Similar
2-4
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the driver door. If K is
pressed again within five seconds, all remaining doors
unlock. The interior lamps turn on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabled
through the DIC, the remote unlock feedback can
be programmed to have the horn chirp and/or the turn
signals flash to confirm unlocking. See “UNLOCK
HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-52.
The high-beam headlamps and parking lamps may turn
on when K is pressed. See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS”
under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-52.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the content
theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-16.
V (Remote Trunk Release):
Press and hold for
approximately one second to open the trunk. The trunk
will open using the transmitter when the vehicle speed is
less than 2 mph (3 km/h) if the vehicle has a manual
transmission, when the ignition is off, or when the vehicle
shift lever is in P (Park) if the vehicle has an automatic
transmission.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter
is programmed. Each vehicle can have up to four
transmitters programmed to it.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press to locate
the vehicle. The horn sounds three times and the
headlamps and turn signals flash three times.
Press and hold L for approximately three seconds to
sound the panic alarm. The horn sounds and the
headlamps and turn signals flash for 30 seconds.
Press L again to cancel the panic alarm.
2-5
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT LOW
message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB BATT
LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from
your body could damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
2-6
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote start feature.
This feature allows you to start the engine from outside
the vehicle. It may also start the vehicle’s heating or
air conditioning systems. When you start your vehicle
using the remote start feature, the climate control
system will come on and adjust the interior to the
temperature settings that you left it set to when you
turned the vehicle off.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
The remote start feature provides two separate starts
per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of engine
running time.
After your vehicle’s engine has been started two times
using the remote vehicle start button, the vehicle’s
ignition switch must be turned to ON/RUN and then back
to LOCK/OFF using the key before the remote start
procedure can be used again. See Ignition Positions
on page 2-20 for information regarding the ignition
positions on your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-3 for additional
information.
/ (Remote Start):
This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,
do the following:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s
remote start button until the vehicle’s turn signal
lamps flash.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the engine is running.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine
is running, to extend the time by 10 minutes for the
engine to continue to run.
After entering the vehicle after a remote start, insert and
turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,
unless a time extension has been done or the
vehicle’s key is inserted into the ignition switch and
turned to ON/RUN.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following. The parking lamps will turn off to indicate the
engine is off.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and release the remote start button.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN and then
LOCK/OFF.
Your vehicle’s engine can be started two times,
per ignition cycle, using the transmitter’s remote start
feature.
If the remote start procedure is used again
before the first 10 minute time frame has ended,
the first 10 minutes will immediately expire and the
second 10 minute time frame will start.
2-7
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the follow occur:
• The remote start system is disabled through
the DIC.
•
•
•
•
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
The vehicle’s hood is open.
{ CAUTION:
The hazard warning flashers are on.
The check engine light is on. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-33.
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
• Two remote vehicle starts have already been
provided for that ignition cycle.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote start system
enabled. The system may be enabled or disabled
through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-52 for additional
information.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. The chance of being thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So, all passengers
should wear safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked whenever the vehicle
is driven.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
CAUTION:
2-8
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Power Door Locks
Your vehicle may have
power door locks.
The locks are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s door armrest.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
To lock the driver’s door from the outside, turn the
key clockwise. To unlock the door, turn the key
counterclockwise.
You can also use the remote keyless entry transmitter,
if equipped, to lock and unlock the doors.
From the inside, use the manual lock knobs on each
door or the power door lock switch to lock and unlock
all doors.
Driver’s Switch shown,
Front Passenger’s
Switch similar
Press the side of the switch with the lock symbol to lock
the doors. This is the right side for the driver’s switch
and the left side for the front passenger’s switch.
Press the side of the switch with the unlock symbol to
unlock the doors. This is the left side for the driver’s
switch and the right side for the front passenger’s switch.
2-9
Delayed Locking
Automatic Door Lock
If your vehicle has power locks, it will have the delayed
locking feature.
On vehicles with power door locks, the doors
automatically lock when the shift lever is moved out of
(P) Park for a vehicle with an automatic transmission.
For a vehicle with a manual transmission, the speed
must be greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
This feature will delay the actual locking of the doors for
up to five seconds when the power door lock switch
or remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the
vehicle.
If any door is open when locking the vehicle, three
chimes will sound signaling that the delayed locking
feature is active. Five seconds after the last door
is closed, all of the doors will lock and the turn signal
lamps will flash. To cancel the delay and lock the doors
immediately, press the lock button a second time.
This feature will not lock the doors if the key is in the
ignition.
You can disable this function through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-52.
2-10
The automatic door locking feature cannot be disabled.
Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock
If your vehicle has power locks, it has a programmable
automatic door unlock feature.
The doors can be programmed through the Driver
Information Center (DIC) to automatically unlock several
ways. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-52
for more information.
Rear Door Security Locks (Sedan)
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door. You must open
the rear doors to access
them. The label showing
lock and unlock positions is
located near the lock.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the power door
lock switch, or by lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
Lockout Protection
Security Lock Label
shown
To set the locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
If your vehicle has power door locks, it will have this
feature. If you press the power door lock switch
when the key is in the ignition and any door is open,
all the doors will lock and the driver’s door will unlock.
Be sure to remove the key from the ignition when
locking your vehicle.
The lockout protection can be overridden by pressing
and holding the power door lock in the lock position for
three seconds.
2. Close the door.
2-11
Trunk
To release the trunk lid from the outside, use the key or
the remote keyless entry transmitter, if equipped.
{ CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or
trunk/hatch open:
• Close all of the windows.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between
the body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
CAUTION:
2-12
(Continued)
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
•
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
For more information about carbon monoxide,
see Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.
Remote Trunk Release
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
To open the trunk from
inside the vehicle, press
the remote trunk release
button. It is located
inside the driver storage
compartment on the lower
left side of the instrument
panel.
See Instrument Panel Overview on page 3-4 or Driver
Storage Compartment on page 2-42.
On a manual transmission equipped vehicle, the remote
trunk release works when the ignition is either off or
in ACC/ACCESSORY, or the vehicle speed is less than
2 mph (3 km/h).
On an automatic transmission equipped vehicle,
the remote trunk release works when the shifter is
in P (Park).
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the inside of the trunk lid of the
vehicle. This handle will glow following exposure to light.
Pull the release handle and push the trunk lid open
from the inside to open the trunk.
2-13
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
2-14
Manual Windows
If your vehicle has power
windows, the switches on
the driver’s door armrest
control each of the
windows.
If your vehicle has manual windows, use the window
crank to open and close each window.
Power Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Sedan Shown,
Coupe Similar
In addition, each passenger’s door has a window switch
that controls that door’s window. Press the front of
the switch to open the window. Pull the front of the
switch up to close it.
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature which allows the window to be lowered fully
without continuously pressing the switch. This switch is
labeled AUTO. Press the front of the switch to the
first position, and the driver’s window will open a small
amount. Press the switch down fully and release.
The window goes all the way down.
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the front of
the switch up.
2-15
Window Lockout (Sedan)
Theft-Deterrent Systems
o (Window Lockout): The driver’s window controls
also include a lockout switch. Press the right side of
the switch to prevent the rear passengers from using
their window switches. The driver can still control all the
windows with the lockout on. Press the switch to the left
to return to normal window operation. A red bar on the
right side of the switch indicates that the lockout feature
is off.
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, swing down the visor(s). The visors
can also be detached from the center mount and
swung to the side to cover the windows.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle may have a driver’s side vanity mirror.
Swing down the sun visor and lift the cover to expose
the mirror.
Arming the System
With the ignition off, you can arm the system by pressing
the remote keyless entry transmitter lock button.
The system will arm after either of these things occur:
• Thirty seconds after all the doors are closed.
• Sixty seconds with any door open.
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a second
time while all the doors are closed, the system will
arm immediately. The system will still arm in 60 seconds
if a door is open. When the open door is closed, it will
also become armed.
2-16
The security light, located on the instrument panel
cluster, will turn on to indicate that arming has been
initiated. Once the system is armed, the security light
will flash once every three seconds.
If the security light is flashing twice per second, this
means that a door is open.
If you do not want to arm the system, you may lock the
car with the manual lock knobs, or the power door
lock switch, if equipped, on the doors.
Disarming the System
You can disarm the system by doing any one of the
following:
• Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock
button.
• Turn the ignition on.
If the system is armed and the trunk is opened using
the trunk release button on the transmitter, the system
will temporarily disarm itself and re-arm when the
trunk has been closed. This allows you to exit the
vehicle, lock the doors using the transmitter, and open
the trunk using the transmitter without having to
disarm and re-arm the system.
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will stop
flashing.
How the System Alarm is Activated
If the system is armed, it can be activated by either:
• Opening the driver’s door or trunk. This will cause
a ten second pre-alarm chirp followed by a
thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.
• Opening any other door. This will immediately cause
a full alarm of horn and lights for thirty seconds.
When an alarm event has finished, the system will
re-arm itself automatically.
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
To turn off the system alarm, do one of the following:
• Press the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter. The system will then re-arm itself.
• Press the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. This will also disarm the system.
• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on. This will
also disarm the system.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If you hear three chirps when you press the unlock,
lock, or trunk release buttons on the remote keyless
transmitter, it means that the content theft security
system alarm was previously activated.
2-17
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
2-18
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
start and the security light comes on, there may be
a problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key
appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key.
At this time, you may also want to check the fuse,
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-118.
If the engine still does not start with the other key, your
vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the
first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can
service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-8,
for more information.
It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to
“learn” the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to
have keys made and programmed to the system.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
To program the new key:
1. Verify that the new key has a
1 stamped on it.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the
ON/RUN position within five seconds of the original
key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key® III+ system at this time.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
see your dealer/retailer for service.
2-19
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
Ignition Positions
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer (Automatic Transmission) on page 4-35
or Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on
page 4-41 for the trailer towing capabilities
of your vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-20
The ignition switch has four different positions.
In order to shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal
must be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
9 (LOCK/OFF):
This position locks the steering
column when the key is removed. The key can only be
removed in LOCK/OFF.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position operates
some of the electrical accessories. It unlocks the
steering wheel and ignition.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch
to LOCK/OFF.
R (ON/RUN):
On vehicles with a manual transmission, the ignition
switch can be turned to LOCK/OFF in any shift
lever position.
The steering can bind with the wheel turned off center.
If this happens, move it from right to left while turning
the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work,
then the vehicle needs service.
This is the position in which you can
operate the electrical accessories and to display some
instrument panel cluster warning and indicator lights.
The switch stays in this position when the engine
is running.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle
if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
/ (START):
{ CAUTION:
If you have a manual transmission removing the
key from the ignition switch will lock the steering
column and result in a loss of ability to steer the
vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you need
to turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving,
turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch
will return to ON/RUN for driving.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door
is opened, the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the key is in the ignition.
2-21
Column Lock Release
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, the
following procedure allows the ignition to be turned to
LOCK/OFF and ignition key to be removed in case of a
dead battery or low voltage battery.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in P (Park).
3. Locate the plunger.
4. Press and hold the plunger while turning the ignition
key to LOCK/OFF. Remove the key.
Have the vehicle serviced at your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible.
2. Remove the cover from the bottom of the steering
column.
2-22
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Starting the Engine
These vehicle accessories may be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off.
Place the transmission in the proper gear.
• Audio System
• Power Windows, if equipped
• Sunroof, if equipped
The power windows and sunroof will continue to work
for up to 10 minutes or until any door is opened.
The radio will work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to OFF/LOCK, the radio will continue to work
for 10 minutes or until the driver’s door is opened.
Automatic Transmission
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).
The engine will not start in any other position.
To restart the vehicle when it is already moving,
use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when
the vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transmission
The shift lever should be in N (Neutral) and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal down to the
floor and start the engine. The vehicle will not start
if the clutch pedal is not all the way down.
2-23
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go
of the key. The idle speed will go down as the engine
warms. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the
engine and protects components. If the ignition key
is turned to the START position, and then released
when the engine begins cranking, the engine will
continue cranking for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the key
is held in START for many seconds, cranking will be
stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor
damage. To prevent gear damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the
ignition switch to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2-24
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding
it there as you hold the key in START for a maximum
of 15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds between
each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool. When
the engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,
repeat the procedure. This clears the extra gasoline
from the engine. Do not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather condition at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with am engine coolant heater should be plugged in at
least four hours before starting. An internal thermostat
in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The electrical cord is located on the passenger
side of the vehicle between the strut and the
air cleaner/filter.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{ CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt
AC outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated
for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts, and prevent damaged.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in
the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the
best advice on this.
2-25
Automatic Transmission Operation
If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, the shift
lever is located on the console between the seats.
There are several different
positions for the automatic
transmission.
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the
best position to use when starting the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
{ CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-32.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
(Automatic Transmission) on page 4-35 or Towing
a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on page 4-41.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to
fully apply the regular brakes first and then press
the shift lever button before the vehicle can shift
from P (Park) when the ignition key is in ON/RUN.
2-26
If the vehicle cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure
on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way
into P (Park) as you maintain brake application.
Then press the shift lever button and then move the
shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of
Park (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-33.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission,
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow
on page 4-25.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is
not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving with the
automatic transmission. It provides the best fuel
economy. If you need more power for passing and
you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the accelerator
all the way down.
2-27
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
Control on page 4-17.
I (Intermediate): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed without using
the brakes for slight downgrades where the vehicle
would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade.
If constant upshifting or downshifting occurs while
driving up steep hills, this position can be used to
prevent repetitive types of shifts. You might choose
I (Intermediate) instead of D (Drive) when driving
on hilly, winding roads and when towing a trailer,
so that there is less shifting between gears.
L (Low): This position reduces vehicle speed more
than I (Intermediate) without actually using the brakes.
You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow
or mud. If the shift lever is put in L (Low), the
transmission will not shift into a low gear until the
vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2-28
Manual Transmission Operation
This is the shift pattern for
standard models.
This is the shift pattern for
SS models.
Here is how to operate the manual transmission:
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal and shift into 1 (First).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press
the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into 1 (First) when the vehicle is traveling
less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a
complete stop and it is hard to shift into 1 (First),
put the shift lever in N (Neutral) and let up on the
clutch pedal. Press the clutch pedal back down.
Then shift into 1 (First).
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal as you let up
on the accelerator pedal and shift into 2 (Second).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press
the accelerator pedal.
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth): Shift into 3 (Third),
4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth) the same way you do for
2 (Second). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal down.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
N (Neutral).
N (Neutral): Use this position when you start or idle the
engine.
R (Reverse): To back up, press down the clutch pedal
and shift into R (Reverse).
For SS models, lift upwards on the ring located on the
underside of the shift knob to shift into R (Reverse).
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
Also, use R (Reverse), along with the parking brake,
for parking the vehicle.
2-29
Shift Speeds
No-Lift Upshift (SS Models)
{ CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could
lose control of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift down more than
one gear at a time when you downshift.
Up-Shift Light
If the vehicle has a manual
transmission, there may be
an up-shift light. This light
will show you when to
shift to the next higher gear
for the best fuel economy.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions let
you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly
and shift when the light comes on.
While accelerating, it is normal for the light to go on and
off if you quickly change the position of the accelerator.
Ignore the light when downshifting.
2-30
If the vehicle has the 2.0L turbo engine and manual
transmission, it has the capability of No-Lift Upshifts.
This feature maximizes vehicle acceleration by allowing
you to shift the transmission to a higher gear without
taking your foot off the accelerator. No-Lift Upshifting is
enabled in all Electronic Stability Control modes.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-7 for
more information. Use this feature only when the engine
has reached normal operating temperature. Correct
shifting allows the engine to maintain boost pressure
during shifts, while also keeping the engine from
over-revving.
To utilize this feature:
1. Accelerate the vehicle by fully depressing the
accelerator pedal.
2. Just prior to reaching the maximum engine speed,
quickly complete the upshift utilizing the clutch while
keeping the accelerator pedal fully applied. A quicker
shift maneuver gives the best performance. If the
engine is operated at the maximum engine speed for
greater than one second, the engine exits the No-Lift
Upshift mode and resumes normal engine overspeed
protection.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition
is on, the brake system warning light will come on.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-29.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
If you forget to release your parking brake, a chime
will sound and the PARKING BRAKE message
will appear along with the brake system warning light
when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle
is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-46.
Automatic Shown, Manual Similar
The parking brake lever is located between the front
seats.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
For vehicles equipped with an armrest, lift the console
armrest in order to access the parking brake lever.
2-31
Shifting Into Park
(Automatic Transmission)
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
(Automatic Transmission) on page 4-35 or Towing
a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on page 4-41.
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat
and even catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine
running.
To shift into P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-31 for more
information.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
2-32
If you have to leave an automatic transmission vehicle
with the engine running, be sure the vehicle is in
P (Park) and the parking brake is firmly set before you
leave it. After you have moved the shift lever into
P (Park), hold the brake pedal down. Then, see if you
can move the shift lever away from P (Park) without first
pushing the button. If you can, it means that the shift
lever was not fully locked into P (Park).
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift into
P (Park) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put
too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission.
You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of
P (Park). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque
lock, set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park)
properly before you leave the driver seat. To find
out how, see Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission)
on page 2-32.
Move the shift lever out of P (Park) before you release
the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
Shifting Out of Park
(Automatic Transmission)
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button
fully released, and
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
P (Park) unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal
is applied.
The shift lock release is always functional except
in the case of a an uncharged or low voltage
(less than 9 volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on page 5-39 for more
information.
2-33
To shift out of P (Park):
1. Apply the brake pedal.
Parking the Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the
shift lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
Before leaving the vehicle, fully press the clutch pedal
down, move the shift lever into R (Reverse), and
firmly apply the parking brake. Once the shift lever
has been placed in R (Reverse) with the clutch pedal
pressed down, the ignition key can be turned to
LOCK/OFF, then remove the key and release the
clutch pedal. See Manual Transmission Operation
on page 2-28.
Parking Over Things That Burn
{ CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
2-34
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
(Continued)
{ CAUTION:
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to
CO can cause unconsciousness and even death.
• There are holes or openings in the vehicle
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion
or damage.
CAUTION:
body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
(Continued)
2-35
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information,
see Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle
when the engine is running unless you have to.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set the
parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park).
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission)
on page 2-32.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer (Automatic Transmission) on page 4-35 or
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on page 4-41.
2-36
Mirrors
Outside Manual Mirror
Manual Rearview Mirror
Adjust the outside mirror just to see the side of your
vehicle and have a clear view of objects behind you.
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view of behind your vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you.
Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for
nighttime use.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional
control buttons located at the bottom of the mirror.
See your dealer/retailer for more information on
the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.
See OnStar® System on page 2-39 for more
information about the services OnStar® provides.
If the vehicle has map lamps, press the buttons located
at the bottom of the mirror to turn them on or off.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return it to the original position.
Outside Remote Control Mirror
Adjust the driver outside mirror with the control lever
located on the driver door. Adjust the outside mirrors so
that the side of the vehicle can be seen.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return it to the original position.
2-37
Outside Power Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver door armrest.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return it to the original position.
Outside Convex Mirror
{ CAUTION:
To adjust the mirrors:
1. Move the selector switch located below the four-way
control pad to the left or right to choose either the
driver or passenger side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
Keep the selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
2-38
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror
or glance over your shoulder before changing
lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
OnStar® System
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request
emergency services be sent to your location.
If the keys are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a signal sent to unlock
the doors. OnStar Hands-Free Calling, including
30 trial minutes good for 60 days, is available on most
vehicles. OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation service,
with one trial route, is available on most vehicles.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
contact Roadside Service.
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available
until the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar.
After the first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a
monthly or annual subscription payment plan. If a
payment plan is not selected, the OnStar system and all
services, including airbag notification and emergency
services, may be deactivated and no longer available.
For more information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca
(Canada), or press the OnStar button to speak with
an advisor.
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
described below, or for a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press
the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
2-39
OnStar Services Available with the
Safe & Sound Plan
GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes
good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be
linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or
a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar
advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
(If equipped)
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-40
OnStar Virtual Advisor
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands-Free
Calling that uses minutes to access location-based
weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes. Press
the phone button and give a few simple voice commands
to browse through the various topics. See the OnStar
Owner’s Guide for more information. This feature is only
available in the continental U.S.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-90
for more information.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
How OnStar Service Works
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,
the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or
AACN system deploy. This information usually includes
the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle
was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide
services where it is located.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas, or
at all times.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems
OnStar cannot control that may prevent OnStar from
providing OnStar service at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of the
vehicle in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather
or wireless phone network congestion.
2-41
Your Responsibility
Center Console Storage
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons
is red, the system may not be functioning properly.
Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle
diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press the OnStar
button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active.
For vehicles with a center console storage area, open
with the lever on the front of the console.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.
Cupholders
There are two cupholders located at the front of
the center console, in front of the shift lever.
These cupholders have a liner that can be removed
for cleaning or to accommodate larger cup sizes.
There are also cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located at the rear of the center console.
2-42
Driver Storage Compartment
The driver’s storage compartment is located near the
left side of the steering column on the bottom of
the instrument panel. Pull the cover down to open.
Convenience Net
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store
small loads as far forward as possible. The net
should not be used to store heavy loads.
Sunroof
On vehicles with a
sunroof, the switch that
operates it is located
on the headliner between
the map lamps.
Press the sunroof switch rearward to open the sunroof
to the vent position. If the sunshade is closed, it must
be opened manually in the vent position. Press and hold
the switch rearward a second time to open the sunroof.
If the sunshade is closed, it will open automatically
when the sunroof is opened.
To close the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold
it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if
the switch is released. Close the sunshade by hand.
Notice: Forcing the sunshade forward of the sliding
glass panel may cause damage and the sunroof
may not operate properly. Always close the glass
panel before closing the sunshade.
The sunroof will only operate while the ignition is on, or
turned to ACC/ACCESSORY, or if Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 2-23.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
the vehicle has an electrical failure.
Do not keep the sunroof open for long periods of time.
Debris may collect in the tracks and possibly damage
the sunroof and plug the water draining system.
2-43
✍ NOTES
2-44
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-8
Windshield Washer .........................................3-9
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10
Headlamps ..................................................3-12
Wiper Activated Headlamps ............................3-13
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-13
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-13
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-14
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-14
Dome Lamp .................................................3-15
Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-15
Mirror Reading Lamps ...................................3-15
Electric Power Management ...........................3-15
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-16
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-16
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-17
Climate Controls ............................................3-18
Climate Control System .................................3-18
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-21
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-22
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-23
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-24
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-25
Tachometer .................................................3-25
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-25
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-26
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-27
Charging System Light ..................................3-28
Up-Shift Light ...............................................3-28
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-29
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .....3-30
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Indicator/
Warning Light ...........................................3-30
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/
Warning Light ...........................................3-31
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-32
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-32
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-33
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-36
Security Light ...............................................3-36
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-36
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-37
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-37
Boost Gage .................................................3-38
Reconfigurable Performance Display (RPD) ......3-38
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-43
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-44
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-46
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-52
3-2
Audio System(s) .............................................3-58
Setting the Clock ..........................................3-59
Radio(s) ......................................................3-60
Using an MP3 ..............................................3-72
XM Radio Messages .....................................3-78
Bluetooth® ...................................................3-80
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-90
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-90
Radio Reception ...........................................3-91
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-92
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-92
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Outlet Adjustment on page 3-21.
Outlet Adjustment on page 3-21.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
Cruise Control on page 3-10 (If Equipped).
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43.
Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-24.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-90
(If Equipped).
Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
Windshield Wipers on page 3-8 and Windshield
Washer on page 3-9.
Audio System(s) on page 3-58.
Fog Lamps on page 3-14 (If Equipped).
Trunk Release. See Trunk on page 2-12.
L. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-14.
M. Horn on page 3-6.
N. Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-10
(If Equipped). Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
on page 4-7 (If Equipped).
O. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and
Cigarette Lighter on page 3-17.
P. Shift Lever (Manual Shown). See Manual
Transmission Operation on page 2-28 and
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-26.
Q. Climate Control System on page 3-18.
R. Heated Seats on page 1-4 (If Equipped).
S. Glove Box on page 2-42.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Tilt Wheel
|
A tilt wheel lets the steering wheel be adjusted.
(Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press
| again to turn the flashers off.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering
wheel.
The tilt lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
To tilt the wheel, pull the lever down. Raise or lower the
wheel to a comfortable position, then pull the lever up
to lock the wheel in place.
3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G:
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
5 3:
O:
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Exterior Lamp Control
Flash-to-Pass.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete.
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows
flash rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb may be
burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-118.
3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high
beam, push the turn signal lever away from you.
This indicator light appears
on the instrument panel
cluster when the high
beams are on.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Flash-to-Pass
Move the lever to control the windshield wipers.
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
9 (Off):
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers):
3-8
Turns off the windshield wipers.
For
intermittent or speed sensitive operation. The amount of
delay time varies between wiping cycles due to the
delay setting selected or the speed of the vehicle.
As vehicle speed is increased or decreased, the wiper
interval also increases or decreases.
While the lever is in the intermittent
position, turn the intermittent adjust band with this
symbol on it up or down to select a shorter or longer
delay between wiping cycles. To the left of the adjust
band are bars, increasing in size from bottom to top,
that indicate the frequency of the wipes. Smaller
bars mean the wipers movement is less frequent.
Larger bars mean the movement is more frequent.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker stops the motor until it cools. If the
motor gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away
the snow or ice, and then turn the wipers back on.
6 (Low Speed):
Windshield Washer
x (Delay):
1 (High Speed):
For steady wiping at low speed.
For wiping at a high speed.
8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down for a single
wiping cycle. Hold it there until the windshield wipers
start; then release. The wipers stop after one wiping
cycle. Hold the lever down longer, for more wipe cycles.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before
using them.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen or thaw them. If they become damaged, install
new blades.
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for more
than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps turn on
automatically. They turn off 15 seconds after the wipers
are turned off.
Press the button at the end of the windshield wiper
lever until the washers begin.
{ CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
When the button is released, the washers stop, but the
wipers continue to wipe about three times or resume
the previous speed.
3-9
Cruise Control
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work
at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
The brake must be applied at least one time, after the
vehicle has been started, before cruise control will
function.
{ CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot
drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the
cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
3-10
Setting Cruise Control
{ CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you are not
using cruise, you might hit a button and go into
cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the
outboard side of the
steering wheel.
J (On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control system on
and off.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
RES+ (Resume): Press to resume a set speed and to
accelerate the speed.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
SET– (Set): Press to set a speed and to decrease
the speed.
To set a speed do the following:
1. Press J to turn the cruise control on. The indicator
light on the button will come on.
2. Get to the speed desired.
3. Press the SET– part of the control button and
release it. The CRUISE ENGAGED message
will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
to show the system is engaged.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired speed
and then the brake is applied. This disengages the
cruise control. To return to the previously set speed, you
do not need to go through the set process again.
Once the vehicle is traveling at least 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more, press the RES+ part of the button briefly.
1. Disengage the cruise control by applying the brake
pedal, but do not turn it off. Accelerate to a higher
speed and reset the cruise control.
2. If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press the RES+ part of the button. Hold it there
until you get up to the speed desired, and then
release the button. To increase the vehicle speed in
very small amounts, press the RES+ part of the
button briefly and then release it. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the cruise control system is already engaged,
• Push and hold the SET– part of the button until the
lower speed desired is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the
SET– part of the button briefly. Each time this
is done, the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
slower.
The vehicle returns to the previously selected speed and
stays there.
3-11
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Headlamps
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you
set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down.
Applying the brake will turn off the cruise control.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
Ending Cruise Control
The exterior lamp switch has the following four positions:
There are two ways to end cruise control:
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, parking
lamps, and taillamps.
• Step lightly on the brake pedal or the clutch pedal if
•
the vehicle has a manual transmission. This will
only end the current cruise control session.
Press J to turn the system completely off.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
3-12
; (Parking Lamps):
Turns on the parking lamps and
taillamps only.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Automatically
turns on the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) during
daytime, and the headlamps, parking lamps, and
taillamps at night. This position must be selected in
order for the Wiper Activated Headlamps to be activated.
See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 3-13.
P (Off/On): When operating in AUTO, a momentary
turn of the switch to Off/On will turn the Automatic
Headlamp System off or back on. For vehicles first sold
in Canada, the automatic transmission must be in
P (Park) or the manual transmission must have the park
brake set, before the Automatic Headlamp System
can be turned off.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
The headlamps and parking lamps are activated
15 seconds after the windshield wipers are turned on.
For this feature to work, automatic lighting must be
enabled. See Headlamps on page 3-12 for additional
information.
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. They also turn off
15 seconds after the windshield wiper control is
turned off.
Headlamps on Reminder
If the drivers door is opened with the ignition off and the
lamps on, a warning chime will sound. This indicates
that the headlamps are still on.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada. The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the
instrument panel. Make sure it is not covered, or the
head lamps will be on when not needed.
The DRL system will make the headlamps come on
when the following conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO or the
parking lamps only position.
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
• The parking brake is released.
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps, and instrument panel lights
will not be illuminated unless you have turned the
exterior lamps control to the parking lamp position.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-13
Fog Lamps
For vehicles with fog lamps, the button is located on the
instrument panel, to the left of the steering wheel.
The ignition must be on to use the fog lamps.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The control for this
feature is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
# : Press to turn the fog lamps on off. An indicator
light on the button comes on when the fog lamps are on.
The parking lamps automatically turn on and off when
the fog lamps are turned on and off.
The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beam
headlamps are turned on.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-14
Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights or
counterclockwise to dim the instrument panel lights,
when the parking lamps or headlamps are on.
Dome Lamp
Mirror Reading Lamps
The vehicle may have a dome lamp.
The vehicle may have reading lamps on the rearview
mirror. Press the button to turn the reading lamps on
and off.
Move the lever to the following positions:
9 (Off):
Turns the lamp off, even when a door is
Electric Power Management
opened.
1 (Door): Turns the lamp on whenever a door
is opened.
+ (On):
Turns the dome lamp on.
Entry/Exit Lighting
The lamps inside the vehicle will go on when any door
is opened. These lamps fade out about 20 seconds
after all of the doors have been closed or when the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN. These lamps will also go
on when pressing the trunk release, unlock symbol,
or the horn symbol button on the Remote Keyless Entry
System (RKE) Transmitter.
This vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM),
an advanced control system. It estimates the battery’s
temperature and state of charge and then adjusts
the voltage for best performance and extended life of
the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When
the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly
to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter
gage or voltage display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or
down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will
be displayed.
After the key is removed from the ignition, the lamps
inside the vehicle stay on for about 20 seconds to
provide an illuminated exit.
3-15
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not be
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that
is needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of
some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to
the driver.
3-16
Battery Run-Down Protection
The vehicle has a battery saver feature designed to
protect the vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown protection system
automatically turns the lamp off after 20 minutes.
This prevents draining of the battery.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.
The accessory power outlet is located in the center
console, rearward of the shift lever.
To use the accessory power outlet, remove the cover.
When not in use, always cover the accessory power
outlet with the protective cap.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience
a problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on the accessory power outlet.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
The vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
To use the lighter, located on the instrument panel
below the climate controls, push it in all the way and let
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not
use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
of 15 amperes.
To clean the center console ashtray, remove the entire
ashtray and empty it.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
3-17
Climate Controls
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
9 (Off):
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with this system.
Turn the fan control to this position to turn
the fan off.
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. In any setting
other than off, the fan will run continuously with
the ignition on. The fan must be turned on to run the air
conditioning compressor.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow
inside the vehicle.
Vehicles with Air Conditioning shown,
without Air Conditioning similar
A. Air Delivery Mode
Control
B. Fan Control
C. Temperature
Control
3-18
D. Air Conditioning
E. Rear Window
Defogger
F. Recirculation
Select from the following modes:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel outlets and the floor outlets. Cooler air is directed to
the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield, with some air directed to the side window
outlets and the floor outlets. To defrost the windows
faster, turn the temperature control knob clockwise to
the warmest setting. In this mode, the system runs
the air conditioning compressor.
6 (Floor):
For best results, clear all snow and ice from the
windshield before defrosting.
- (Defog):
# (Air Conditioning): For vehicles with air
conditioning, press this button to turn the air conditioning
system on or off. An indicator light comes on to show
that the air conditioning is on.
Air is directed to the floor outlets, with some
air directed to the windshield and side windows.
This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, side window,
and floor outlets. To defog the windows faster, turn
the temperature control knob clockwise to the
warmest setting. In this mode, the system runs the air
conditioning compressor.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
3-19
For quick cool down on hot days:
H mode.
Select the h mode.
Select # .
1. Select the
2.
3.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of the vehicle to become
too dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
the vehicle has cooled, turn off the recirculation by
pressing the button again.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
The air conditioning compressor cannot be turned on
when the fan is off.
3-20
h (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on. An indicator light comes on to show that
recirculation is on.
This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the
air inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
The air conditioning compressor also comes on.
Recirculation is not available for floor, defog and defrost
modes. If recirculation is selected in any of these
modes, the recirculate indicator light flashes five times
and outside air will be delivered. Operation in this
mode during periods of high humidity and cool
outside temperatures may result in increased window
fogging. If window fogging is experienced, select
the defrost mode.
Outside Air: This mode allows outside air to circulate
through the vehicle. This mode is automatically
active if recirculate is not selected. There is no button
for outside air.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Use the thumbwheels located next to and below the air
outlets to change the direction of the airflow and to
open and close the outlets.
The rear window defogger only works when the ignition
is in ON/RUN.
< (Rear):
Press to turn the rear window defogger on
or off. Be sure to clear as much snow from the rear
window as possible. An indicator light comes on to show
that the rear window defogger is on.
The rear window defogger turns off about 15 minutes
after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the
defogger only runs for about seven minutes before
turning off. If the vehicle is moving faster than 50 mph
(80 kph), the rear defogger will stay on. The defogger
can also be turned off by turning off the engine.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into the vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach
a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or
anything similar to the defogger grid.
3-21
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The filter removes dust and pollen from the air which
is drawn into the vehicle. Airflow reduction is an
indication that the filter needs to be replaced.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for replacement intervals. To find out
what type of filter to use, see Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-14.
To access the passenger compartment air filter:
1. Open and empty the glove box.
3. Pull the tab at the back of the glove box toward you
and open the passenger compartment air filter door
downward.
2. Lower the glove box door by pressing in on each
side and lowering from the track.
3-22
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is
a problem with one of the vehicle’s functions.
Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine
is started to indicate they are working.
4. Pull the filter out toward you.
Install the new air filter with the AIR FLOW arrow
pointing downward. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reassemble.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there
may be a problem, check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs
can be costly and even dangerous.
3-23
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going,
about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.
United States SS, Manual Transmission Cluster shown, Canada, Base and Automatic Transmission similar
3-24
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
The speedometer shows the speed in both miles per
hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Safety Belt Reminder Light
The vehicle’s odometer works together with the Driver
Information Center (DIC). Trip A and Trip B can be
set on the odometer. See “Trip Information” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-44.
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the
safety belt, unless the driver safety belt is already
buckled.
The vehicle does not have to be running to check the
odometer mileage. Simply open the driver’s door and the
mileage briefly displays.
If the vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed,
the new one will be set to the correct total mileage of the
old odometer.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
The safety belt light comes
on and stays on for
several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
Notice: If the engine is operated with the tachometer
in the shaded warning area, the vehicle could be
damaged, and the damages would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Do not operate the engine with
the tachometer in the shaded warning area.
3-25
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
sounds for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs
if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
Sensing System (Without Turbo Engine) on page 1-61
or Passenger Sensing System (With Turbo Engine)
on page 1-67 for more information. The passenger
safety belt light, located on the instrument panel, comes
on and stays on for several seconds and then flashes
for several more.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
3-26
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle
the safety belt.
Airbag Readiness Light
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on page 1-54.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is
started. If the light does
not come on then, have it
fixed immediately.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46
for more information.
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
See Passenger Sensing System (Without Turbo Engine)
on page 1-61 or Passenger Sensing System (With Turbo
Engine) on page 1-67 for important safety information.
The instrument panel has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. If you
are using remote start to start the vehicle from a
distance, if equipped, you may not see the system
check. Then, after several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or
off symbol to let you know the status of the right
front passenger frontal airbag.
3-27
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition is turned
on, and the engine is not
running, as a check to
show it is working. Then
it should go out when the
engine is started.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-26
for more information, including important safety
information.
3-28
If the light stays on, or comes on while driving, there
may be a problem with the electrical charging system.
Have it checked by your dealer/retailer. Driving while this
light is on could drain the battery.
If a short distance must be driven with the light on, turn
off all accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.
Up-Shift Light
The vehicle may have an
up-shift light.
When this light comes on, shift to the next higher gear if
weather, road, and traffic conditions allow.
See Manual Transmission Operation on page 2-28 for
more information.
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking both
parts need to be working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected right away.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
also comes on when the parking brake is set. The light
stays on if the parking brake does not fully release.
If it stays on after the parking brake is fully released,
it means the vehicle has a brake problem.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop carefully. Make sure the parking brake is fully
released. The pedal might be harder to push or,
the pedal could go closer to the floor. It can take longer
to stop. Try turning off and restarting the vehicle one
or two times, if the light is still on, have the vehicle towed
for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
{ CAUTION:
United States
Canada
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
This light should come on briefly when the engine is
started. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn if there is a problem.
3-29
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine
is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is
not on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also
on, the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and
there is a problem with the regular brakes. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 3-29.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for all
brake related DIC messages.
3-30
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Indicator/Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Enhanced Traction
System (ETS), this light
serves as an indicator and
warning light.
This light comes on briefly while the engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the indicator/warning light is on and not flashing, the
ETS system could have been disabled. Check all related
Driver Information Center (DIC) messages to determine
whether the system has been turned off or if the system is
not working properly and the vehicle requires service.
If the ETS has been disabled, wheel spin is not limited.
If the indicator/warning light is on and flashing, the ETS
is actively working. The LOW TRACTION DIC message
also appears when the system is actively limiting
wheel spin.
See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-13
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for
more information.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system or
the Traction Control
System (TCS), the
indicator/warning light
comes on briefly when the
engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light goes off.
If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin is not limited. If the
ESC system is disabled, the system does not aid
in maintaining directional control of the vehicle.
If the indicator/warning light is on and flashing, the TCS
or the ESC system is actively working. Check the
DIC messaging for details to determine which system is
working. If the LOW TRACTION message appears,
the system is limiting wheel spin. If the ESC ACTIVE
message appears, the system is aiding in maintaining
directional control of the vehicle.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-7 and
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-10 for more
information.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for
more information on the messages associated with
this light.
If this light is on while certain DIC messages display,
this indicates that the ESC and TCS are not working or
are disabled.
If this light is on and not flashing, the TCS and
potentially the ESC system have been disabled. Check
the DIC messaging to determine which feature(s) is
no longer functioning and whether it is because of the
driver turning off the feature(s), or because the system is
not working properly and the vehicle requires service.
3-31
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This light comes on briefly
while starting the vehicle.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light goes off.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause the vehicle to overheat.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-32. The vehicle’s
engine could be damaged, and it might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive with the
engine coolant temperature warning light on.
The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on
when the engine has overheated.
If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon
as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-32
for more information.
3-32
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes on
briefly when the engine
is started.
It provides information about tire pressures and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly
underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate to the
proper pressure. See Tires on page 5-54 for more
information.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
This indicates that there could be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes
for about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder
of the ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with
every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-64 for more information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
This system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might
not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
3-33
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
See Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Reduce vehicle speed.
Avoid hard accelerations.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
3-34
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
• Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
the Tank on page 5-8. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle’s electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.
Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run
as efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling
after start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed
into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection.
This can happen if the battery has recently
been replaced or if the battery has run down.
The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate
critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This can take several days of routine
driving. If this has been done and the vehicle still
does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD II
system readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
3-35
Oil Pressure Light
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not
flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle could be
low on oil and it might have some other system problem.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-16.
{ CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
3-36
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps
are in use.
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-14 for more information.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with the fuel gage:
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8
for more information.
• The gage moves a little while turning a corner or
speeding up.
• The gage does not go back to empty when the
Fuel Gage
ignition is turned off.
The fuel gage shows
about how much fuel the
vehicle has left.
For the fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-124.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
3-37
Boost Gage
This gage is automatically centered at zero every time
the engine is started. Actual vacuum or boost is
displayed from this zero point. Changes in ambient
pressure, such as driving in mountains and changing
weather, will slightly change the zero reading.
Reconfigurable Performance
Display (RPD)
United States
Canada
If equipped, this gage is located near the driver side of
the instrument panel cluster.
This gage indicates vacuum during light to moderate
throttle and boost under heavier throttle.
This gage displays the air pressure level in the intake
manifold before it enters the engine’s combustion
chamber.
3-38
For vehicles with the RPD, the screen displays
information that can be used to monitor vehicle
performance. The RPD knob located next to the screen
is used to configure the display and select information
to be viewed.
A short video plays whenever the ignition key is turned
on. Press the RPD knob to stop the video and go
directly to RPD displays.
Region A Gage and Speedometer
Displays
Change the information displayed in Region A by
turning the knob either clockwise or counterclockwise.
The available gages are:
BOOST: Displays positive boost pressure as
determined by the manifold air pressure (MAP) sensor.
AIR/FUEL RATIO: Displays the mass ratio of air to fuel.
RPD Screen Example US Version Shown, Canada
Similar (French Display Currently Not Available)
The RPD screen displays two divided areas (A, B) of
information called Regions. Advance through Region A
screens to show various gages and speedometer
displays. Advance through Region B screens to show
digital readouts and indicator information.
The position of these regions can be reversed. See the
SETUP MENU for more information.
When the ignition is turned off and then back on,
the RPD shows the last screen displayed.
CAM PHASER ANGLES: Displays orientation of the
intake and exhaust cam shafts relative to their park
positions as commanded by the engine control module.
OVERLAP represents the total distance the intake
and exhaust cam shafts have phased.
SPARK ADVANCE/ KNOCK RETARD: The spark
advance gage displays ignition timing. Knock retard
indicates the amount of ignition delay to reduce spark
knock.
ENGINE POWER & TORQUE: Displayed engine power
and torque are engine flywheel output values calculated
by the engine control module. These values are
approximate and may change with the air conditioning
load, generator output, air temperature, air pressure, and
fuel octane.
3-39
SPEEDOMETER & G FORCE: The G FORCE meter
displays lateral acceleration. While turning right,
G forces are felt on the left, and vice versa. PEAK
values are stored indefinitely, and can be reset with a
press and hold of the RPD knob while viewing the
G FORCE meter.
SETUP MENU: Press the RPD knob to enter this
menu. The vehicle should be stopped while configuring
the setup menu selections.
SCREEN OFF: Turns the screen off.
Region B Readout Displays
Press the RPD knob to highlight Region B.
The information displayed can be changed by turning
the RPD knob either clockwise or counterclockwise.
Press the RPD knob again, to store the selection.
The selection will also be stored after a few seconds
of no activity. Available modes are:
Readouts #1
SHIFT LIGHTS/GEAR INDICATION: The shift lights
provide visual identification of engine speed for a
transmission gear. Shift light minimum and maximum
RPM settings can be viewed and configured in the
SETUP screen.
3-40
Readouts #2
TIRE PRESSURES: Displays the last gage tire
pressures recorded from each of the wheel mounted
tire pressure sensors.
Readouts #3
BAROMETER: Displays ambient air pressure as
measured by the engine’s ambient pressure sensor.
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE: Displays ambient
temperature as measured by an outside air temperature
sensor.
BATTERY VOLTAGE: Displays the vehicle’s battery
voltage.
Readouts #4
COOLANT TEMPERATURE: Displays engine coolant
temperature as measured by a coolant temperature
sensor.
INLET AIR TEMPERATURE: Displays the
instantaneous temperature of the air at the inlet to the
induction system.
FUEL PRESSURE: Displays fuel pressure as measured
by a sensor on the output of the high-pressure fuel pump.
INDICATORS
The indicators come on when the corresponding
function is actively working to stabilize or control the
vehicle. Each indicator light on the RPD display can be
turned on and off using the SETUP MENU. These
indicators work independently of the telltales on the
instrument panel cluster. Turning the indicator on
the RPD display on or off does not enable or disable
the functions on the vehicle.
This indicator comes on when Competitive Driving
Mode (A) has been set using the traction control switch.
This telltale comes on whenever conditions are right
for the Launch Mode (B) to activate.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-7 for
more information on Competitive Driving Mode and
Launch Control.
This indicator comes on whenever the vehicle
StabiliTrak® is actively working.
This indicator comes on whenever the vehicle Traction
Control system is actively working.
3-41
SETUP MENU
SETUP MENU Options
The SETUP MENU allows for the appearance of each
display screen to be customized. Turn the knob to scroll
through the screens to reach the SETUP MENU. Press
and release the knob to activate the SETUP MENU.
GAUGE APPEARANCE: While the gage is highlighted,
press the RPD knob. Then turn the knob to choose
the background color for a gage. Press the knob again
when gage color is chosen.
SHIFT LIGHT SETUP: This screen establishes a RPM
range where the shift light comes on for each gear.
Turn the RPD knob to highlight a shift light setting.
Press the knob to allow adjustment of the highlighted
setting. Turn the knob to adjust the value up or
down, then press the knob again to allow the selection
of another item. The number above each gear shows
the highest RPM the light comes on for a gear range.
The number below each gear indicates the lowest RPM
the light comes on for a gear range.
Selecting a SETUP MENU Option
1. Under SETUP MENU there are six menu options to
choose. Turn the RPD knob to highlight an option.
2. Press and release the RPD knob to select
the highlighted menu option.
3-42
INDICATORS ON/OFF: Select on or off for each
indicator by turning the RPD knob to highlight ON or
OFF. Press and Release the RPD knob to apply
the choice. The actual Traction Control, StabiliTrak®,
Competitive Mode, Launch Control functions and
instrument panel cluster telltales are not enabled or
disabled by these indicators.
SCREEN ORDER: While the screen order is
highlighted, press the knob to allow adjustment.
Turn the knob to reverse the displayed order of
Region A and Region B. Press the knob again once
the screen is chosen.
CONTRAST: While the contrast slider is highlighted,
press the knob to allow adjustment. Turn the knob
to adjust the contrast of the screen. Press the knob
again when the desired contrast is reached.
RESTORE DEFAULTS: Restores the original factory
screen defaults.
Applying a SETUP MENU Option
After each screen is customized, use this procedure to
apply the change and return to the SETUP MENU.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC display gives you the status of many of your
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display driver
personalization menu modes and warning/status
messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display,
located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC buttons are
located on the left side of
the steering wheel.
SET: Applies the changes to the display.
1. Turn until SET is highlighted.
2. Press and release while SET is highlighted to lock
in the setting and return to the previous screen.
RETURN /RET: Returns the display to the previous
screen without saving changes.
1. Turn to highlight the RETURN/RET option.
2. Press and release knob to return to the
previous menu.
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the vehicle information mode displays.
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle
information mode displays, select a personalization menu
mode setting, or acknowledge a warning message.
Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the
same time for one second, then release the buttons
to enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-52 for more information.
3-43
DIC Operation and Displays
TRIP A or TRIP B
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has
different modes which can be accessed by pressing
the DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in
the following.
Press the information button until TRIP A or TRIP B
display. These modes show the current distance
traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both odometers can
be used at the same time.
Information Modes
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the following vehicle information modes:
Outside Air Temperature and Odometer
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature and the odometer display. This mode
shows the temperature outside of the vehicle in either
degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C) and
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). The outside air
temperature appears on the left side of the DIC display
and the odometer appears on the right side of the
display.
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
see “UNITS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-52.
3-44
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the
reset button for a few seconds while the desired
trip odometer is displayed.
FUEL RANGE
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE
displays. This mode shows the remaining distance you
can drive without refueling in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy and the
fuel remaining in the tank.
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW displays.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range
is an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)
AV (Average) SPEED
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) AVG
displays. This mode shows how many miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your
vehicle is getting based on current and past driving
conditions.
Press the information button until AV SPEED displays.
This mode shows the vehicle’s average speed in
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold the
reset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed.
Average fuel economy is then calculated starting
from that point. If the average fuel economy is not reset,
it is continually updated each time you drive.
MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INST
displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy
at a particular moment and changes frequently as
driving conditions change. This mode shows the
instantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average
fuel economy, this screen cannot be reset.
To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold the
reset button while AV SPEED is displayed.
OIL LIFE
Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’s
remaining useful life. It shows 100% when the system
is reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oil
on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
Oil on page 5-15 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”
under Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19.
3-45
COOLANT
DIC Warnings and Messages
Press the information button until COOLANT displays.
This mode shows the temperature of the engine coolant
in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
These messages appear if there is a problem detected
in one of your vehicle’s systems.
Tire Pressure
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS), the pressure for each tire
can be viewed in the DIC. The tire pressure is shown in
either pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
Press the information button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF
displays for the front tires. Press the information
button again until LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for
the rear tires.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to
check the tire pressure appears in the display.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-62 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for more
information.
A message clears when the vehicle’s condition is no
longer present. To acknowledge a message and clear it
from the display, press and hold any of the DIC buttons.
If the condition is still present, the warning message
comes back on the next time the vehicle is turned
off and back on. With most messages, a warning chime
sounds when the message displays. Your vehicle
may have other warning messages.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is disabled with the headlamp switch.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is enabled with the headlamp switch.
BRAKE FLUID
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when
the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on.
3-46
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-29 for more
information. Have the brake system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
CHANGE OIL SOON
This message displays when the life of the engine oil
has expired and it should be changed.
When this message is acknowledged and cleared from
the display, the engine oil life system must still be
reset separately. See Engine Oil Life System on
page 5-19 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information.
See Tires on page 5-54, Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-26, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-62.
The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-44. If the tire
pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light
comes on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-32.
COMPETITIVE MODE
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully
tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure that it
is on properly. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the message off.
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays
when the Competitive Driving mode is selected.
The Traction Control System (TCS) will not be operating
while in the Competitive Driving mode and the
ESC/TCS light on the instrument panel cluster will be on
solid. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-10, Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) on page 4-7, and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-31 for more
information.
CHECK TIRE PRESS (Pressure)
COOLING MODE ON
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS), this message displays
when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle’s tires
needs to be checked. If a tire pressure message
appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can.
Have the tire pressures checked and set to those
shown on the Tire Loading Information label.
This message may display on some vehicles. Under
severe conditions, hot ambient temperatures, steep
grades, and towing, your vehicle may experience more
transmission shifting. This is temporary and normal
under these conditions. This does not require engine or
transmission service.
CHECK GAS CAP
3-47
CRUISE ENGAGED
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE
This message displays when the cruise control system
is active. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more
information.
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on
the instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC is
assisting you with directional control of the vehicle.
You may feel or hear the system working and see this
message displayed in the DIC. Slippery road conditions
may exist when this message is displayed, so adjust
your driving accordingly. This message may stay on for
a few seconds after ESC stops assisting you with
directional control of the vehicle. This is normal when
the system is operating. See Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) on page 4-7 and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 3-31 for more information.
DOOR AJAR
This message displays if one or more of the vehicle’s
doors are open. Make sure that the door(s) are
closed completely.
ENGINE DISABLED
This message displays if the starting of the engine is
disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED
This message displays to inform you that the vehicle
has reduced engine power to avoid damaging the
engine. Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’s
ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but there
is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven
at a reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this
message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to
your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
3-48
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) NOT
READY
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message may display briefly after starting the
vehicle if the system’s sensors are not yet calibrated.
The system is not functional until the message
stops displaying. Adjust your driving accordingly.
When the message is no longer displayed, the system
is functional. See Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
on page 4-7 for more information.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on
the instrument panel cluster comes on solid when
ESC is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-7
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-31
for more information.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
This message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery in
the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2-4.
LAUNCH CONTROL
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays
after the COMPETITIVE MODE message when the
vehicle is stopped. Launch control is a form of traction
control to control wheel spin while launching the vehicle
during closed track events and competitive driving
venues. The system will exit to COMPETITIVE MODE
after the vehicle is launched. See “COMPETITIVE
MODE” earlier in this section. See “Launch Control”
under Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-7 for
more information.
LEARN COMPLETE
On vehicles without the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, this message displays when the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) has completed the tire
learning process. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 5-64 for more information.
LOW COOLANT
If your vehicle has a 2.0L engine, this message displays
when there is a low level of engine coolant. Have the
cooling system serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible. See Engine Coolant on page 5-28 for
more information.
LOW FUEL
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel
Gage on page 3-37, Fuel on page 5-5, and Filling the
Tank on page 5-8 for more information.
3-49
LOW TRACTION
SERVICE AIR BAG
If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
or Traction Control System (TCS), this message
displays and the ETS light or the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster flashes when the system is
actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions
may exist if this message is displayed, so adjust
your driving accordingly. This message stays on for a
few seconds after the system stops limiting wheel spin.
See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-13
or Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-10 and
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 3-30 or Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 3-31 for more information.
This message displays when there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
PARKING BRAKE
This message displays if the parking brake is left
engaged. See Parking Brake on page 2-31 for more
information.
POWER STEERING
This message displays if a problem has been detected
with the electric power steering. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.
3-50
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY
CONTROL)
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and a chime sounds if there has
been a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster.
This light stays on solid as long as the detected problem
remains present. When this message displays, the
system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-7
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-31
for more information.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and
then back on. If this message still stays on or turns back
on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs
service. Have the ESC inspected by your dealer/retailer
as soon as possible.
SERVICE TRACTION
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR
If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
or Traction Control System (TCS), this message
displays and a chime sounds when the system is not
functioning properly. The ETS light or the ESC/TCS light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This
light stays on solid as long as the detected problem
remains present. When this message displays, the
system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-13
or Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-10 and
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 3-30 or Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 3-31 for more information. Have the
system serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS), this message displays if a
part on the TPMS is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on
page 3-32. Several conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 5-65 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
SVC (Service) BRAKE SYSTEM
This message may display if you have a turbocharged
vehicle with Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and if
the hydraulic brake boost is not working or is working
improperly. Have the brake system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
TIRE LEARN ON
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) and does not have the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system, this message
displays when the TPMS is re-learning the tire positions
on your vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned
after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or
sensor. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-70,
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-64, and
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-62 for more
information.
3-51
TRACTION OFF
If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
or Traction Control System (TCS), this message
displays and the ETS light or the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on solid when the
system is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-13 or
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-10 and
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 3-30 or Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 3-31 for more information.
TRUNK AJAR
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely. See Trunk on page 2-12.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to a preferred setting.
All of the features listed may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the features available will be
displayed on the DIC.
3-52
The default settings for the features were set when your
vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed
from their default state since that time.
To change feature settings, use the following procedure:
Entering Personalization Menu
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at
the same time for one second, then release to enter
the personalization menu.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h),
only the UNITS menu will be accessible.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes.
Press the reset button to scroll through the available
settings for each mode.
If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,
the display will go back to the previous information
displayed.
Personalization Menu Modes
TIRE LEARN?
OIL LIFE RESET
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS), this mode is available on
vehicles without the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system. After rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or
sensor, the TPMS must re-learn the tire positions.
To re-learn the tire positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 5-64. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-70 and DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-46 for more information.
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the
engine oil life system. To reset the system, see Engine
Oil Life System on page 5-19. See “OIL LIFE” under
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-44 for more
information.
UNITS
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle
information. When UNITS appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
ENGLISH (default in United States): All information
will be displayed in English units.
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be
displayed in metric units.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows
remote start to be turned off or on. Remote start allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle
using your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
When REMOTE START appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-6 for more
information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
3-53
LOCK HORN
UNLOCK HORN
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp
every time the lock button on the RKE transmitter
is pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When LOCK
HORN appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp
on the first press of the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter, can be enabled or disabled. When UNLOCK
HORN appears on the display, press and hold the
reset button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The horn
will still chirp on the second press.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2-4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
3-54
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2-4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
LIGHT FLASH
DELAY LOCK
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), this
feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior hazard/turn
signal lighting to flash every time the lock, unlock,
or trunk release buttons on the RKE transmitter are
pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When LIGHT
FLASH appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY
LOCK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will not
flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons on
the RKE transmitter are pressed.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting
will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons
on the RKE transmitter are pressed.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the power lock
switch or the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter a second time.
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressing
the power lock switch or the lock button on the
RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2-4 for more information.
See Power Door Locks on page 2-9, Delayed Locking
on page 2-10, and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2-4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
3-55
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled.
When AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
UNLK (Unlock)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically unlock.
This screen displays only if your vehicle has an
automatic transmission and DRIVER or ALL is selected
for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines
when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When
UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
You will need to manually unlock the doors.
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key is
turned off.
If you have a manual transmission vehicle, the door(s)
will automatically unlock when the ignition is turned off.
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
If you have an automatic transmission vehicle, you can
select when the automatic unlocking will occur. See
“UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transmission Only)”
following.
See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock on
page 2-10 for more information.
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.
See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock on page 2-10
for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
3-56
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
LANGUAGE
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior perimeter
lighting to turn on each time the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.
When EXT LIGHTS appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears on
the display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn on
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
To select a setting and exit out of the personalization
menu mode, press the information button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 2-4 for more information.
Exiting Personalization Menu
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
The personalization menu will be exited when any of the
following conditions occur:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in English.
FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.
GERMAN: All messages will appear in German.
• A ten second time period has elapsed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The end of the personalization menu list is reached.
3-57
Audio System(s)
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
{ CAUTION:
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
3-58
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not
work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 2-23 for more information.
Setting the Clock
With Date Display
Without Date Display
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port, and
Radio with Single CD (MP3) Player
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single CD Player
To set the time:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.
2. Press H until the hour begins flashing on the
display. Press H a second time and the minute
begins flashing on the display.
3. While either the hour or the minute numbers are
flashing, turn f to increase or decrease the time.
4. Press H again until the clock display stops flashing
to set the currently displayed time; otherwise, the
flashing stops after five seconds and the current
time displayed is automatically set.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour, press the H button until 12H or 24H is
displayed. Once 12H or 24H is displayed, turn the
f knob to the desired option to select the setting.
Press the H button again to apply the setting, or let the
screen time out.
To set the time and date:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.
2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
3. Press the softkey located below any one of the tabs
that you want to change.
4. To increase the time or date do one of the following:
• Press the softkey located below the selected tab.
• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.
• Turn f clockwise.
5. To decrease the time or date do one of the following:
• Press ©SEEK or s REV.
• Turn f counterclockwise.
3-59
The date does not automatically display. To see the
date press H while the radio is on. The date with display
times out after a few seconds and goes back to the
normal radio and time display.
Radio(s)
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
1. Press H and then the softkey located below the
forward arrow label. Once the time 12H and 24H,
and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and
year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)
displays.
2. Press the softkey located below the desired option.
3. Press H again to apply the selected default, or
let the screen time out.
3-60
Radio with CD (Base)
Radio Data System (RDS)
The radio may have RDS. The RDS feature is
available for use only on FM stations that broadcast
RDS information. This system relies upon receiving
specific information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. While the radio is
tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name or
call letters display. In rare cases, a radio station could
broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio
features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the
radio station.
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown,
Radio with CD (MP3) similar
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system.
3-61
Playing the Radio
Finding a Station
O (Power/Volume):
BAND: Press to choose between FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM™ (if equipped) on the Radio with CD (Base).
Press to choose between FM, AM, XM (if equipped) on
the Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port or the Radio
with CD (MP3).
Press to turn the system on and
off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with
the Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) feature
automatically adjust the radio volume to compensate for
road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows
down, so that the volume level is consistent.
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM tab on
the radio display.
4. Press the softkey under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds.
3-62
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
©SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong
signal in the selected band.
• To seek stations, press and release ©SEEK to go
to the previous station and stay there.
• To scan stations, press and hold ©SEEK for a
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then
goes to the next station. Press ©SEEK again to
stop scanning.
• To scan preset stations in the selected band,
press and hold ©SEEK for four seconds until
a double beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored
preset, plays for a few seconds, then goes to
the next stored preset. Press ©SEEK again to
stop scanning preset stations.
¨SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong
signal in the selected band.
• To seek stations, press and release ¨SEEK to go
the top line of the display while the artist information will
be displayed on the bottom line, it the information is
available during XM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback.
When information is not available, “No Info” displays.
to the next station and stay there.
• To scan stations, press and hold ¨SEEK for a
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then
goes to the next station. Press ¨SEEK again
to stop scanning.
• To scan preset stations in the selected band,
press and hold ¨SEEK for four seconds until
a double beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored
preset, plays for a few seconds, then goes to
the next stored preset. Press ¨SEEK again to
stop scanning preset stations.
4
(Information): For vehicles with the Radio with CD
(Base), press to switch the display between the
radio station frequency and the time. While the ignition
is off, press 4 to display the time.
For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA, or RDS features,
press 4 to display additional text information related to
the current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3,
WMA song. Song title information will be displayed on
Storing Radio Stations
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, radio
stations are stored as either favorites or presets.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Radio that have a FAV button store radio stations as
favorites.
Drivers are encouraged to set up radio station favorites
while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite
stations using the softkeys, favorites button, and steering
wheel controls. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can
be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located
below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the
radio favorites page button (FAV button). Press FAV
to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having
six favorite stations available per page. Each page
of favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or
XM stations. The current balance/fade and tone
settings are also stored with the favorite stations.
3-63
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to the desired radio station and set the
balance/fade and tone settings to the desired levels.
2. Press FAV to display the page where to store
the station.
3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a
beep sounds.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio station to be stored
as a favorite.
To setup the number of favorites pages:
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey located below the FAV 1-6 tab.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the softkey located below the displayed
page numbers.
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time out, to return to
the original main radio screen showing the radio
station frequency tabs and to begin programming
favorites.
3-64
Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, CD, MP3, and
WMA features): If additional information is available
for the current song being played, Auto Text will
automatically page/scroll the information every
three seconds above the FAV presets on the radio
display. By default, Auto Text is enabled.
To change the Auto Text setting:
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey under AUTO TXT tab on the radio
display.
3. Press the softkey under the ON or OFF tab on the
radio display.
If 4 is pressed and the song title or artist information
is longer than what can be displayed, the extra
information will page every three seconds when Auto
Text is activated.
Storing a Radio Station as a Preset
Radios that have numbered pushbuttons store radio
stations as presets.
To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with CD (MP3)
and USB Port or the Radio with CD (MP3):
1. Press
f until the tone control tabs display.
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),
can be programmed on the six numbered buttons.
2. Press the softkey below the desired tab to be
adjusted.
To store preset stations:
3. To increase the level of the bass, midrange, or
treble:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for
three seconds until a beep sounds.
3. Repeat the Steps 1 and 2 for each numbered button.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):
The radio may display some or all tones such as BASS,
MID, and TREB.
To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with CD (Base):
Press f until the tone control labels display, then turn f
to change the setting.
• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.
• Turn f clockwise.
4. To decrease the level of the bass, midrange, or
treble:
• Press ©SEEK, or s REV.
• Turn f counterclockwise.
The radio may be capable of adjusting bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position by pressing the
softkey below the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for more
than two seconds. The radio beeps once and the level
adjusts to the middle position.
3-65
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and
speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f
for more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.
3. Turn f to adjust the highlighted setting.
The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by
pressing either SEEK arrow.
If a station’s frequency is weak, or has static, decrease
the treble.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select preset
equalization settings.
To return to the manual mode, press EQ until Manual
displays or start to manually adjust the bass, midrange,
or treble by pressing f .
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, the
Balance/Fade can be adjusted using f or ` .
To adjust balance or fade using
1. Press
f:
f until the speaker control tabs display.
2. Press the softkey under the desired tab, or continue
pressing f to highlight the desired tab.
3-66
On some radios, \ FWD and s REV can also
be used to adjust the highlighted level.
`:
` until the speaker control labels display.
Continue pressing ` until the desired speaker
To adjust balance or fade using
1. Press
2.
control label displays.
3. Turn f to adjust the setting. The setting can
also be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow,
\ FWD, or s REV.
The radio may be capable of adjusting balance or fade
to the middle position by pressing the softkey below
the BAL or FADE tab for more than two seconds.
The radio beeps once and the level adjusts to the
middle position.
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and
speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f
for more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM Satellite Radio Service Only)
CAT (Category): The radio may have the CAT button
feature.
To select and find a desired category:
1. Press BAND until the XM frequency displays.
2. Press CAT to display the category tabs on the radio
display. Continue pressing the CAT button until the
desired category name displays.
3. Press either of the two softkeys below the desired
category tab to immediately tune to the first XM
station associated with that category.
4. To go to the previous or to the next XM station within
the selected category, do one of the following:
• Turn f.
• Press the softkeys below the right or left arrows
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey below the XM CAT tab.
3. Turn
f to display the category to be removed.
4. Press the softkey below the Remove tab until the
category name along with the word Removed
displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove additional categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing
the softkey under the Add tab when a removed category
displays or by pressing the softkey below the Restore
All tab.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
on the radio display.
• Press ©SEEK or ¨SEEK.
5. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display the favorites
again.
3-67
Radio Messages
Loading a CD
Calibration Error: Displays if the radio is no longer
calibrated properly for the vehicle. The vehicle must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD begins playing.
®
Loc or Locked: Displays when the THEFTLOCK
system has activated. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
XM Satellite Radio Service
Ejecting a CD
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound.
During your trial or when you subscribe, you will get
unlimited access to XM Radio Online for when you are
not in the vehicle. A service fee is required to receive
the XM service. For more information, contact XM
at xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Z EJECT: Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
Radio Messages for XM Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-78 for more
information.
3-68
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
©SEEK: Press to go to the start of the current track,
if more than ten seconds have played. Press and
hold or press multiple times to continue moving
backward through the tracks on the CD.
¨SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through the tracks on the CD.
s REV (Reverse):
Press and hold to reverse playback
quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the track displays.
Release to resume playing the track.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track
displays. Release to resume playing the track.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing the track number displays when a CD is in
the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, No Aux Input Device Found
may display.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio may have the ability to play an MP3 CD-R or
CD-RW disc. See Using an MP3 on page 3-72 for
more information.
RDM (Random): Tracks can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order.
To use random:
1. Press the softkey below RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays.
2. Press the softkey again to turn off random play.
3-69
CD Messages
Care of CDs
CHECK DISC: If an error message displays and/or the
CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
Store CD(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD
player scans the bottom of the disc. If the bottom of
a CD is damaged it may not play properly or at all.
Do not touch the bottom of a CD while handling it.
Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
• The CD player is very hot. When the temperature
returns to normal, the CD should play.
• The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• A problem may have occurred while burning the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
3-70
If the surface of a CD is dirty, take a soft, lint free cloth
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to
the edge.
Care of the CD Player
Do not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in the CD
player. Use a marking pen to write on the top of the
CD if a description is needed.
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage the
CD player.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” earlier in this
section.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system may have an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is
not an audio output; do not plug the headphone set
into the front auxiliary input jack. An external audio
device such as an iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player,
CD changer, etc. can be connected to the auxiliary
input jack for use as another audio source.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive
Driving on page 4-2 for more information on driver
distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
O (Power/Volume):
Turn to adjust the volume.
Additional volume adjustments may have to be made
from the portable device if the volume is too quiet or
not loud.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable
audio device is connected to the auxiliary input.
The portable audio device continues playing until it is
stopped or turned off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is connected to the auxiliary input.
Press again and the system begins playing audio
from the connected portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, No Aux Input Device
may display.
3-71
Using the USB Port
Using an MP3
Radio’s with a USB port can control a USB storage
device or an iPod® using the radio buttons and knobs.
See Using an MP3 on page 3-72 for information
about how to connect and control a USB storage device
or an iPod.
Format
USB Support
Radios that have the capability of playing MP3’s can
play .mp3 or .wma files that were recorded onto a CD-R
or CD-RW disc. Radios that have a USB port can play
.mp3 and .wma files that are stored on a USB storage
device as well as AAC files that are stored on an iPod®.
The USB connector is located on the front of the radio
and uses the USB 2.0 standard.
Compressed Audio
USB Supported Devices
• USB Flash Drives
• Portable USB Hard Drives
• Fifth generation or later iPod
• First, Second, or Third generation iPod nano
• iPod touch
• iPod classic
Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from Apple®
for proper operation. iPod firmware can be updated using
the latest iTunes® application. See apple.com/itunes.
For help with identifying your iPod, go to
apple.com/support.
3-72
The radio can play discs that contain both uncompressed
CD audio and MP3 files. If both formats are on the disc,
the radio reads all MP3 files first, then the uncompressed
CD audio files.
CD-R or CD-RW Supported File and Folder
Structure
The radio supports:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 50 folders.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
Up to 50 playlists.
Up to 255 files.
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.
Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension.
USB Supported File and Folder Structure
Order of Play
The radio supports:
Tracks are played in the following order:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 700 folders.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
Up to 65,535 files.
Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.
Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.
AAC files stored on an iPod.
FAT16
FAT32
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. Files are stored
in the root directory when the disc or storage device
does not contain folders. Files accessed from the root
directory of a CD display as F1 ROOT.
Empty Folder
Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the
player advances to the next folder that contains files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder has
played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. The display does not show parts of words
on the last page of text and the extension of the
filename is not displayed.
3-73
Preprogrammed Playlists
CDs that have preprogrammed playlists that were
created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however,
there is no playlist editing capability using the radio.
These playlists are treated as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and
are stored on a USB device may be supported by
the radio with a USB port.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files on the CD currently
playing.
©SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or
press multiple times to continue moving backward
through tracks.
¨SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
s REV (Reverse):
Press and hold to reverse playback
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the
elapsed time of the file displays. Release s REV to
resume playing.
3-74
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the file displays.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
S c (Previous Folder):
Press the softkey below S c
to go to the first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey below
go to the first track in the next folder.
c T to
RDM (Random): MP3 files can be listened to on a
CD in random, rather than sequential order. To use
random, press the softkey under the RDM tab until
Random Current Disc displays to play songs from the
current CD in random order. Press the same softkey
again to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey below
h to have the files played in order by artist or
album. The player scans the disc to sort the files by
artist and album ID3 tag information. It can take
several minutes to scan the disc depending on the
number of files on the disc. The radio may begin playing
while it is scanning in the background.
When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files
in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown
on the second line of the display. Once all songs by that
artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.
Connecting a USB Storage Device
or iPod®
To listen to files by another artist, press the softkey
located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the next
or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue
pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the
desired artist displays.
To connect a USB storage device, connect the device
to the USB port located on the front of the radio.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album:
1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab.
2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab from
the sort screen.
3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return to
the main music navigator screen.
The album name displays on the second line between
the arrows and songs from the current album begins
to play. Once all songs from that album have played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical order
on the CD and begins playing MP3 files from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey
below the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.
The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a
USB storage device.
To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cable
that came with the iPod to the iPod’s dock connector
and connect the other end to the USB port located
on the front of the radio. If the vehicle is on and the USB
connection works, “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo
may appear on the iPod and iPod appears on the radio’s
display. The iPod music appears on the radio’s display
and begins playing.
The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle if
the vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPod
automatically powers off and will not charge or draw
power from the vehicle’s battery.
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported,
it can still be used by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input
Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) stereo cable.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
information.
3-75
Using the Radio to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
Using Softkeys to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod
using the radio buttons and knobs and display song
information on the radio’s display.
The five softkeys below the radio display are used to
control the functions listed below.
f (Tune): Turn to select files.
©SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or
press multiple times to continue moving backward
through tracks.
To use the softkeys:
1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio display
to display the functions listed below, or press the
softkey below the function if it is currently displayed.
2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function on
it to use that function.
¨SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
j (Pause): Press the softkey below j to pause the
track. The tab appears raised when pause is being used.
Press the softkey below j again to resume playback.
s REV (Reverse):
Back: Press the softkey below the back tab to go back
to the main display screen on an iPod, or the root
directory on a USB storage device.
Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release s REV to resume playing. The elapsed
time of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed
time of the file displays.
4
(Information): Press to display additional information
about the selected track.
3-76
c (Folder View): Press the softkey below c to
view the contents of the current folder on the USB drive.
To browse and select files:
c.
f to scroll through the list of folders.
Press f to select the desired folder. If there is
1. Press the softkey below
2. Turn
3.
more then one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
the desired folder is reached.
4. Turn f to scroll through the files in the selected
folder.
5. Press
f to select the desired file to be played.
To select files:
1. Press the softkey below
3.
• First softkey, first item in the list.
• Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
4.
• Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
• Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
• Fifth softkey, end of the list.
h (Music Navigator):
Press the softkey below h
to view and select a file on an iPod, using the iPod’s
menu system. Files are sorted by:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Playlists
Artists
f to scroll through the list of menus.
Press f to select the desired menu.
Turn f to scroll through the folders or files in the
2. Turn
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
softkey is pressed.
h.
selected menu.
5. Press
f to select the desired file to be played.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
• First softkey, first item in the list.
• Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
• Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
• Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
• Fifth softkey, end of the list.
Albums
Genres
Songs
Composers
3-77
Repeat Functionality
To use Repeat:
Press the softkey below " or
Repeat All and Repeat Track.
' to select between
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey below " to repeat
all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All
is being used. This is the default mode when a
USB storage device or iPod is first connected.
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs): Press the
softkey below = or < to shuffle all songs on the USB
storage device or iPod.
< (Shuffle Album): Press the softkey below > to
shuffle all songs in the current album on an iPod.
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the softkey below > to
shuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storage
device.
' (Repeat Track): Press the softkey below ' to
repeat one track. The tab appears raised when Repeat
Track is being used.
XM Radio Messages
Shuffle Functionality
To use Shuffle:
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Press the softkey below > , 2 , < or = to select
between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs,
Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
> (Shuffle Off):
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
Press the softkey below 2 to turn
shuffle off. This is the default mode when a USB storage
device or iPod is first connected.
3-78
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in service.
Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle could
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having the
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned
to channel 0, there could be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
3-79
Bluetooth®
Audio System
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make
and receive phone calls. The system can be used while
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.
The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to
30 ft. (9.1 m). Not all phones support all functions,
and not all phones are guaranteed to work with
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See gm.com/bluetooth
for more information on compatible phones.
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for
later calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume
level is used if the volume is turned down too low.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-90 for more
information.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
bg (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
c x (Phone On Hook):
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
3-80
Bluetooth Controls
Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions
before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is
not connected, calls will be made using OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner’s guide for more information.
Pairing Information:
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
Pairing a Phone
1. Press and hold bg for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on
this process.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number
that was provided in Step 3.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
3-81
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold bg for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold bg for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold bg for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
3-82
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold bg for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
4. After the system stores the phone number,
it responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
• If the name tag does not sound correct,
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
number to be re-entered.
say “No” and repeat Step 5.
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold bg for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
3-83
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• If the name tag does not sound correct,
say “No” and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
3-84
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
1. Press and hold bg for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
• Delete
• Delete all name tags
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold bg for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete, <name
tag>? Please say yes or no”.
• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
•
•
•
•
Dial
Digit Dial
Call
Re-dial
Using the Dial Command
1. Press and hold bg for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar,
if present.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>. Number please” followed by a tone.
To use the delete all name tags command:
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
1. Press and hold bg for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this?
Please say yes or no.”
• If the system does not recognize the number,
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the number to be
re-entered.
main menu.
3-85
Using the Digit Dial Command
1. Press and hold bg for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be dialed
is complete. After the whole number has been
entered, say “Dial”. The system responds with “OK,
Dialing” and dials the number.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
will repeat them.
Using the Call Command
1. Press and hold bg for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
3-86
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed
by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling,
<name tag>” and dials the number. If the name
tag is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the name tag to be re-entered.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Using the Re-dial Command
1. Press and hold bg for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Receiving a Call
Three-Way Calling
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the
Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service
carrier to work.
• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
• Press c x to ignore a call.
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
• Press b g again to return to the original call.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
• Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
4. Once the call is connected, press
the callers together.
b g to link all
Ending a Call
Press
c x to end a call.
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
3-87
To Mute a call
1. Press bg . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.
To Cancel Mute
1. Press bg . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press bg for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
1. Press and hold bg for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press bg . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK,
accessing <phone name>”.
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
3-88
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is
used when calling a menu driven phone system.
Account numbers can be programmed into the
phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls.
Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press bg . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
1. Press bg . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds
with “Say a name tag to send tones” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the name tag to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely.
This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook
and phone pairing information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the above sections
on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
3-89
Other Information
®
Theft-Deterrent Feature
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending on
the vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
e + / e – (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.
w / x (Next / Previous): Press to change radio
stations, select tracks on a CD, or to select tracks and
navigate folders on an iPod® or USB device.
3-90
To change radio stations:
• Press and release w or x to go to the next or
previous radio station stored as a preset.
• Press and hold w or x to go to the next or
previous radio station in the selected band with a
strong signal.
To select tracks on a CD:
Press and release
previous track.
w or x to go to the next or
• To go back further in the folder list, press and
hold
c (End):
x.
Press to reject an incoming call, or end a
current call.
bg (Mute/Voice Recognition):
To select tracks on an iPod or USB device:
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
2. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down the
list, then press and hold w to play the highlighted
track.
To navigate folders on an iPod or USB device:
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
2. Press and hold
folder list.
3. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down
the list.
• To select a folder, press and hold w when the
folder is highlighted.
x to go back to the previous
Press to silence the
vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth systems press
and hold b g for longer than two seconds to interact
with those systems. See OnStar® System on page 2-39
and Bluetooth® on page 3-80 for more information.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
3-91
AM
Cellular Phone Usage
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
causes an increased level of static while listening to
the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
FM Stereo
Fixed Mast Antenna
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that
automatically works to reduce interference, some static
can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged as long as it is securely attached
to the base. If the mast becomes slightly bent, straighten
it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills
can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or
standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or
tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period
of time.
3-92
Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is
tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand until fully seated plus one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
or the rear of the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear
of obstructions for clear radio reception.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............4-2
Driving for Better Fuel Economy .......................4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunk Driving .................................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-4
Braking .........................................................4-4
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-5
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-6
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ......................4-7
Traction Control System (TCS) .......................4-10
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ....................4-13
Limited-Slip Differential ..................................4-15
Steering ......................................................4-15
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-17
Passing .......................................................4-17
Loss of Control .............................................4-17
Racing or Other Competitive Driving ................4-19
Driving at Night ............................................4-19
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-20
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-21
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-22
Winter Driving ..............................................4-23
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .............................................4-25
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-26
Loading the Vehicle ......................................4-26
Towing ..........................................................4-32
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-32
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-32
Towing a Trailer (Automatic Transmission) ........4-35
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) ...........4-41
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
•
•
•
•
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
• Combine several trips into a single trip.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
4-2
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-10.
{ CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have
been associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
4-3
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-10,
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-13, and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-7.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-29.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
4-4
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between the
vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet,
dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with
the traffic and allowing realistic following distances
eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes
are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down.
If the engine stops, there will still be some power brake
assist but it will be used when the brake is applied.
Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer to
stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.
If the vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and
the 2.0L turbocharged engine, it also has a hydraulic
brake boost feature which supplements the power brake
system to maintain consistent brake performance
under conditions of low brake booster vacuum.
Low brake booster vacuum conditions can include initial
start up after the vehicle has been parked for several
hours, very frequent brake stops, or high altitude driving.
When hydraulic brake boost is active, minor brake
pulsation or movement might be felt but this is normal.
If brake pedal feel changes or the brake pedal feels
hard to push, the system might not be receiving
the intended brake boost and the SVC BRAKE SYSTEM
DIC message may be displayed.
Under certain weather or operating conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal, or other noise might
be heard with the vehicle’s performance braking system.
The brake system on SS models is designed for
superior fade resistance and consistent operation using
high performance brake pads. Brake noise and brake
dust are normal and do not affect system performance.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
The vehicle might have the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
an advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent
a braking skid.
If the vehicle has ABS,
this warning light on the
instrument panel comes on
briefly when the vehicle
is started.
When the engine is started, or when the vehicle begins
to drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-5
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to
get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply
the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. A slight brake pedal
pulsation might be felt or some noise noticed, but this
is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
If the vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC) with
Antilock Brake System (ABS), it allows the driver to steer
and brake at the same time. However, if the vehicle does
not have ESC with ABS, the first reaction — to hit the
brake pedal hard and hold it down — might be the wrong
thing to do. The wheels can stop rolling. Once they do,
the vehicle cannot respond to the driver’s steering.
Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it was
headed when the wheels stopped rolling. That could be
off the road, into the very thing the driver was trying to
avoid, or into traffic.
If the vehicle does not have ABS, use a “squeeze”
braking technique. This gives maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. Do this by pushing on
the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This helps retain steering control. Without ABS, it is
different. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5.
In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
4-6
Brake Assist
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
If this vehicle has ESC with ABS, it also has a Brake
Assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping or
decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the stability system
hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power
brake system under conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in
an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle.
The stability system hydraulic brake control module
increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle
until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal pulsations
or pedal movement during this time is normal and
the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as
the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature
will automatically disengage when the brake pedal
is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
The vehicle may have an Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system which combines antilock brake, and
traction and stability control systems that help the driver
maintain directional control of the vehicle in most
driving conditions.
When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the
system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure
there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with the vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS
light comes on, and the ESC OFF and/or SERVICE ESC
message displays.
For more information, see Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 3-43 and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 3-31.
4-7
This light flashes on the
instrument panel cluster
when the ESC system
is on and activated.
ESC activates when the computer senses a discrepancy
between the intended path and the direction the
vehicle is actually traveling. ESC selectively applies
braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s brakes to
help steer the vehicle in the intended direction.
When the system activates, an ESC ACTIVE message
displays on the Driver Information Center. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46. This light also
flashes on the instrument panel cluster when the
ESC system is on and activated. Noise or vibration may
be felt in the brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to
steer the vehicle in the desired direction.
When the light is on solid and the message(s),
SERVICE ESC, ESC OFF, or both display, the system
will not assist the driver in maintaining directional
control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.
4-8
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is
automatically enabled whenever the vehicle is started.
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control,
especially in slippery road conditions, always leave the
system on. ESC can be turned off if needed.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system begins
to assist the driver maintain directional control of the
vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. The cruise control
can be re-engaged when road conditions allow.
See Cruise Control on page 3-10.
The ESC/TCS button is
located on the instrument
panel.
The traction control system can be turned off or back on
by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both
traction control and ESC, press and hold the button from
five to ten seconds.
When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION
OFF and ESC OFF messages appear, and the
ESC/TCS light comes on to warn the driver that both
traction control and ESC are disabled.
It is recommended that the system remain on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice
or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt
to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the
system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle
is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-25.
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that
a problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF and
SERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light comes
on to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and requires
service. If the problem does not clear after restarting
the vehicle, see your dealer/retailer for service. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for more
information.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information.
Competitive Driving Mode
(SS Models Only)
The driver can select this optional handling mode by
pressing the ESC/TCS button on the console two times
quickly. COMPETITIVE MODE will be displayed in the
DIC. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.
Competitive Driving Mode allows the driver to have
full control of the front wheels while the ESC system
helps maintain directional control of the vehicle by
selective brake application. The ESC/TCS light will be
on and the traction control system will not be operating.
Adjust your driving accordingly. This electronic stability
control mode is recommended only for use during closed
track events and competitive driving venues.
When the ESC button is pressed again, or the vehicle
is restarted, the ESC and TCS will be turned back on.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, or
Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to
lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the front
wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible
to cause damage to the transmission. Do not attempt
to shift when the front wheels do not have traction.
Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not
covered. See your warranty book for additional
information.
4-9
Launch Control (SS Models Only)
Traction Control System (TCS)
Launch Control is a form of traction control, to control
tire spin while launching the vehicle during closed track
events and competitive driving. The feature is activated
when the vehicle is at rest while in Competitive Mode.
At rest, if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the
floor with the clutch engaged, the RPM is limited to a
predetermined level. A smooth, quick release of
the clutch while keeping the accelerator pedal on the
floor will provide controlled wheel spin for consistent
acceleration. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission, complete shifts as described in Manual
Transmission Operation on page 2-28.
The vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that the front wheels are spinning too much
or are beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power by closing the throttle and managing engine spark
to limit wheel spin.
LAUNCH CONTROL displays in the DIC after the
COMPETITIVE MODE message, when the vehicle is
stopped. The system will exit to COMPETITIVE MODE
after the vehicle is launched. See “Competitive Driving
Mode” earlier in this section. The normal Traction
Control System (TCS) will not be operating while in the
Competitive Driving mode and the TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-46 for more information.
4-10
This light flashes while the
traction control system is
limiting wheel spin.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working.
This is normal and does not mean there is a problem
with the vehicle.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-31
for more information.
If the vehicle is in cruise control while TCS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. The cruise control can be re-engaged when
road conditions allow. See Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 3-7.
When this light is on and
either the SERVICE
TRACTION or TRACTION
OFF message is displayed,
the system will not limit
wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-46 for more information.
It may also be necessary to turn off the system when
driving in off-road conditions where high wheel spin
is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow on page 4-25.
To turn the system off or
on, press and release the
ESC/TCS button located
on the instrument panel.
The DIC displays the appropriate message as described
previously when the button is pressed.
The Traction Control System comes on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started. It is recommended
to leave the system on for normal driving conditions,
but it may be necessary to turn the system off if the
vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, and you
want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it.
4-11
Traction Control Operation
Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine
power to the wheels (engine speed management)
and by applying brakes to each individual wheel
(brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when the vehicle is started, and it will activate and flash
the ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTION
message if it senses that either of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving.
For more information on the LOW TRACTION message,
see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43.
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle are allowed to
spin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and
Brake warning lights and the SERVICE ESC and/or
SERVICE TRACTION messages are displayed, the
differential could be damaged. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Reduce engine
power and do not spin the wheel(s) excessively while
these lights and this message are displayed.
4-12
Notice: When traction control is turned off, or
Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to
lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the drive
wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible
to cause damage to the transmission. Do not attempt
to shift when the drive wheels do not have traction.
Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not
covered. See the warranty book for additional
information.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction
in acceleration may be noticed or a noise or vibration
may be heard. This is normal.
If the vehicle is in cruise control while the system
activates, the ESC/TCS light flashes and the cruise
control automatically disengages. The cruise control can
be re-engaged when road conditions allow. See Cruise
Control on page 3-10.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information.
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
The vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if
it senses that one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system reduces engine power and may
also upshift the transmission to limit wheel spin.
If the vehicle has ETS, there is not an ESC/TCS button
on the instrument panel. To turn the system off, shift
to L (Low) or R (Reverse). There is more information
about how to turn the system off later in this section.
The ETS indicator/warning light flashes and LOW
TRACTION appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) when the traction control system is actively limiting
wheel spin. The system may be heard or felt while it
is working, but this is normal. Slippery road conditions
may exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your
driving accordingly.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the ETS begins
to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. The cruise control can be re-engaged
when road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on
page 3-10.
The ETS indicator/warning light may come on for the
following reasons:
• The indicator/warning light flashes while the traction
control system is limiting wheel spin.
• If the system is turned off by moving the shift lever to
L (Low), the indicator/warning light comes on and
stays on. To turn the system back on, move the
shift lever back to a position other than L (Low).
The indicator/warning light should go off.
• The indicator/warning light will come on when the
parking brake is set with the engine running, and it
will stay on if the parking brake does not release fully.
If the transmission shift lever is in any position other
than L (Low) and the indicator/warning light stays on
after the parking brake is fully released, there is a
problem with the system.
• If the traction control system is affected by an engine
related problem, the system will turn off and the
indicator/warning light will come on.
4-13
If the ETS indicator/warning light comes on and stays
on for an extended period of time when the transmission
shift lever is in any position other than L (Low), the
vehicle may need service.
When this light is on solid, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Check the DIC messaging to determine whether it is
because of the driver turning off the system, or that the
system may not be working properly and the vehicle
requires service. When this light is turned on, either the
SERVICE TRACTION or TRACTION OFF message
will be displayed.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for
more information on the messages associated with
this light.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions,
ETS should always be left on. But the system can be
turned off if needed.
4-14
To turn the system off, shift to L (Low) or R (Reverse).
When the system is turned off, the ETS indicator/
warning light will come on and stay on and the
TRACTION OFF message will be displayed when the
gear shift is in L (Low). The indicator/warning light
and message will not come on when the gear shift is in
R (Reverse). If the ETS is limiting wheel spin when
the transmission is shifted to L (Low) or R (Reverse) to
turn the system off, the indicator/warning light and
TRACTION OFF will come on in L (Low). But the system
will not turn off right away. It will wait until there is no
longer a current need to limit wheel spin. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for more
information on the messages associated with this light.
The system can be turned back on at any time by
shifting to D (Automatic Overdive) or I (Intermediate).
The ETS indicator/warning light should go off.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information.
Limited-Slip Differential
Vehicles with a limited-slip differential can give more
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like
a standard axle most of the time, but when traction
is low, this feature allows the drive wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle. The limited slip design
has minimal impact to the steering feel, but boosts the
traction performance under all conditions.
Steering
Electric Power Steering
If the engine stalls while driving, the power steering assist
system will continue to operate until you are able to stop
the vehicle. If power steering assist is lost because the
electric power steering system is not functioning, the
vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time, you
may notice a reduced amount of power steering assist.
The normal amount of power steering assist should return
shortly after a few normal steering movements.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems and/or the POWER STEERING message
comes on, contact your dealer/retailer for service
repairs. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
4-15
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes — but, unless the vehicle
has antilock brakes, not enough to lock the wheels.
See Braking on page 4-4. It is better to remove as much
speed as possible from a collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be
turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-16
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your
side of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches,
8 to 13 cm, (about one-eighth turn) until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering
wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-17
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
If the vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS)
or the Enhanced Traction System (ETS), remember:
It helps to avoid only the acceleration skid. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-10 or Enhanced
Traction System (ETS) on page 4-13. If the vehicle does
not have TCS or ETS, or if the system is off, then an
acceleration skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
4-18
If the vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
the ESC might activate. See Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) on page 4-7.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause
the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is
slippery until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize
warning clues — such as enough water, ice, or
packed snow on the road to make a mirrored
surface — and slow down when you have any doubt.
If the vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If the
vehicle does not have ABS, then in a braking skid,
where the wheels are no longer rolling, release enough
pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again.
This restores steering control. Push the brake pedal
down steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long
as the wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.
Racing or Other Competitive Driving
See your warranty book before using your vehicle for
racing or other competitive driving. After reviewing your
warranty book, please see the GM Performance Parts
website or catalog and contact the race sanctioning
bodies, for example Sports Car Club of America (SCCA)
or Grand American, for parts and equipment required for
racing or other competitive driving.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
•
•
•
•
•
Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns
or curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
rearview mirror.
4-19
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and deep-standing
or flowing water.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
{ CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
4-20
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
•
•
•
•
•
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-54.
• Turn off cruise control.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full?
Windows clean — inside and outside?
•
•
•
•
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
Have up-to-date maps?
4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear.
{ CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
{ CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-22
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate
too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5 improves
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads,
but whether the vehicle has ABS or not, apply the
brakes sooner than when on dry pavement. Without
ABS, if the vehicle begins to slide, let up on the brake
pedal a little and apply steady pedal pressure to get the
most traction. On vehicles without ABS, braking so
hard that the wheels stop rolling can cause the vehicle
to slide — brake so the wheels always keep rolling
so you can still steer.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when
the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
If the vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-10 or Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
on page 4-13, it improves the ability to accelerate on
slippery roads, but slow down and adjust your driving to
the road conditions. When driving through deep snow,
turn off the ETS, if equipped, to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds.
4-23
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-8.
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
CAUTION:
• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on
•
•
{ CAUTION:
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
•
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
CAUTION:
4-24
(Continued)
(Continued)
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide,
see Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about
to keep warm also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle
speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.
Do this as little as possible to save fuel.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle
when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See Rocking Your
Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-26.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
{ CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be injured.
The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine
compartment fire or other damage. Spin the wheels
as little as possible and avoid going above 35 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-78.
4-25
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the
area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, or with a manual transmission, between
1 (First) or 2 (Second) and R (Reverse), spinning the
wheels as little as possible. To prevent transmission
wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting,
and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when
the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels
in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking
motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not
get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be
towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification
label.
4-26
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on
the vehicle can break, and it can change the
way your vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Label Example
for a two door vehicle or below the door lock post
for a four door vehicle. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also
shows the tire size of the original equipment
tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more information on tires
and inflation see Tires on page 5-54 and
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-62.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label either attached above the door lock post
4-27
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
4-28
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer (Automatic Transmission)
on page 4-35 or Towing a Trailer (Manual
Transmission) on page 4-41 for important
information on towing a trailer, towing safety
rules, and trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
300 lbs (136 kg)
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
700 lbs (317 kg)
and Cargo Weight =
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 2 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
750 lbs (340 kg)
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
250 lbs (113 kg)
Weight =
4-29
Certification Label
Example 3
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 3 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
0 lbs (0 kg)
Weight =
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-30
A vehicle specific Certification label, found on
the rear edge of the driver’s door, tells you
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed
the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out. See “Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this section.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on
the vehicle can break, and it can change the
way your vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as the vehicle
goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if
there is a crash, they will keep going.
{ CAUTION:
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In
a trunk, put them as far forward as you
can. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
4-31
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-8.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
4-32
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
• Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 4-21.
Dinghy Towing
3. Shift an automatic transmission to N (Neutral) or a
manual transmission to Neutral.
Dinghy Towing From the Front
4. Release the parking brake.
To prevent the battery from draining while the vehicle is
being towed, remove the following fuse from the floor
console fuse block: 8 (Ignition Switch, PASS-Key® III+).
See Floor Console Fuse Block on page 5-119 for
more information.
Remember to reinstall the fuse once the destination has
been reached.
Notice: If 65 mph (105 km/h) is exceeded while
towing the vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing the vehicle.
The vehicle may be dinghy towed from the front with
all four wheels on the ground following these steps:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY to
unlock the steering wheel.
4-33
Dinghy Towing From the Rear
Dolly Towing
Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed
from the rear.
The vehicle cannot be dolly towed, but can be dinghy
towed. See “Dinghy Towing” earlier in this section.
4-34
Notice: Dolly towing your vehicle may cause
damage because of reduced ground clearance.
Always tow your vehicle using the dinghy towing
procedure listed in this section or put your vehicle
on a flatbed truck.
Towing a Trailer
(Automatic Transmission)
{ CAUTION:
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears
later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before pulling a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra
heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment.
4-35
Pulling A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
transmission or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts.
• Do not tow when the outside air temperature is
above 100°F (38°C).
• Do not tow more than 1,000 miles (1 600 km)
per year.
4-36
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• The total weight on the vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can depend on any special equipment on
the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle
can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in
this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information
or advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance
Offices. See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6
for more information.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight
of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo
carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the
vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a
trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW
because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-26 for more
information about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
If using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
on the rear axle.
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
4-37
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Tire-Loading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-26. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit
for the vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight of the
trailer tongue.
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to
help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch. Always leave just
enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
Hitches
Trailer Brakes
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
Does the trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
they are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.
• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
• Will there be any holes in the body of the vehicle
after installing a trailer hitch? If there are, then be
sure to seal the holes later when the hitch is
removed. If the holes are not sealed, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from exhaust can get into the vehicle.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-35. Dirt and water
can also enter the vehicle.
4-38
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open
road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now
longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
Passing
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the
vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. For this reason you may think other
drivers are seeing the signal when they are not.
It is important to check occasionally to be sure the
trailer bulbs are still working.
4-39
Driving on Grades
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher
than normal engine and transmission temperatures
may result and damage the vehicle. Frequent stops
are very important to allow the engine and
transmission to cool.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission
is not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
Pay attention to the engine coolant gage. If the
indicator is in the red area, turn off the air conditioning
to reduce engine load. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-32.
When towing under severe conditions such as hot
ambient temperatures or steep grades, the vehicle may
experience more transmission shifting. A COOLING
MODE ON message may also appear in the DIC.
This alerts the driver that the shifting mode is in progress
and is aiding engine cooling. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-46 for more information.
Parking on Hills
{ CAUTION:
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can
be damaged. When possible, always park the rig
on a flat surface.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
4-40
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
• Start the engine.
• Shift into a gear.
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-32.
Towing a Trailer
(Manual Transmission)
Do not tow a trailer if the vehicle is equipped with a
manual transmission.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more on this. Things that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid,
engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. It is a good idea to inspect these before
and during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-41
✍ NOTES
4-42
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle .................................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-15
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-19
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (2.0L Turbo Engine) ....5-21
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (2.2L Engine) ............5-24
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-25
Manual Transmission Fluid .............................5-26
Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................5-26
Cooling System ............................................5-26
Engine Coolant .............................................5-28
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-31
Engine Overheating .......................................5-32
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-34
Brakes ........................................................5-35
Battery ........................................................5-38
Jump Starting ...............................................5-39
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-44
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-46
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-46
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps ....................................5-47
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-48
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps (Coupe) .......5-49
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps (Sedan) .............................5-50
Back-Up Lamps (Coupe) ................................5-51
License Plate Lamp ......................................5-52
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-53
Tires ..............................................................5-54
Winter Tires .................................................5-55
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-56
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-60
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-62
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-64
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-65
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-70
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-71
Buying New Tires .........................................5-72
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-74
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-74
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-76
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-76
Tire Chains ..................................................5-78
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-79
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ....................5-80
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage .........5-88
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-88
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-90
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire (All Models Except SS) ...............5-94
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire (SS Model) ...............................5-98
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..............5-106
Compact Spare Tire ....................................5-109
Appearance Care ..........................................5-110
Interior Cleaning .........................................5-110
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................5-111
Leather ......................................................5-112
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces .................................................5-112
5-2
Care of Safety Belts ....................................5-112
Weatherstrips .............................................5-113
Washing Your Vehicle ..................................5-113
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................5-113
Finish Care ................................................5-114
Windshield and Wiper Blades .......................5-114
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim ................................................5-115
Tires .........................................................5-116
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-116
Finish Damage ...........................................5-116
Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-116
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-116
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-117
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-117
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-117
Electrical System ..........................................5-117
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-117
Headlamp Wiring ........................................5-118
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-118
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-118
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-118
Floor Console Fuse Block ............................5-119
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................5-120
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-124
Service
Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/retailer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-73.
5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain
perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-17.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-72.
5-4
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-117.
Gasoline Octane
If the vehicle has the 2.2L L4 engine (VIN Code H),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
If the vehicle has the 2.0L L4 engine (VIN Code X),
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the
vehicle’s acceleration could be slightly reduced, and
you might notice a slight audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark knock. If the octane is
less than 87, you might notice a heavy knocking
noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
Otherwise, you could damage the engine. If you are
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear
heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
5-5
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines containing MMT.
See Additives on page 5-6 for additional information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves,
look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, the
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog-check
test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-33.
If this occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer
for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
5-6
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS
is the only gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
5-7
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your
Vehicle on page 5-113.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-33.
The CHECK GAS CAP message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not properly
installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46
for more information.
{ CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-33.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
5-10
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following.
1. Pull the interior hood
release lever with this
symbol on it. It is
located under the
instrument panel on
the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood release lever to the left. It is
located under the front center of the hood toward
the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. After you have partially lifted the hood, a gas strut
will automatically take over to lift and hold the hood
in the fully open position.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Lower the hood until the lifting force
of the strut is reduced, then release the hood to
latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is closed
and repeat the process if necessary.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 2.2L L4 engine, here is what you will see:
5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (2.0L Turbo Engine) on
page 5-21 or Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (2.2L Engine)
on page 5-24.
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
D. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-35 and Hydraulic Clutch
on page 5-26.
E. Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-120.
F. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-39.
G. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 5-39.
H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-26.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-34.
5-13
When you open the hood on the 2.0L L4 engine, this is what you will see:
5-14
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (2.0L Turbo Engine) on
page 5-21 or Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (2.2L Engine)
on page 5-24.
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
C. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on
page 5-26.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
E. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-35 and Hydraulic Clutch
on page 5-26.
F. Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-120.
G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-39.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 5-39.
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-26.
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-34.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-15
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, add at least
one quart/liter of the recommended oil. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-124.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,
the engine could be damaged.
5-16
2.2L Engine
2.0L L4 Engine
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
For Vehicles With the 2.2L L4 Engine
Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
5-17
For Vehicles with the 2.0L L4 Engine Only
Look for three things:
Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718M
Standard designation can cause engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
• GM4718M
This vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M, such as Mobil 1® or
equivalent. Oils meeting this standard may be
identified as synthetic. However, not all synthetic
oils will meet this GM standard. Use only an oil that
meets GM Standard GM4718M.
5-18
This vehicle’s engine was filled at the factory with a
synthetic oil meeting all requirements for this vehicle.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
might not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
Cold Temperature Operation
For Vehicles With the 2.2L L4 Engine
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine
Oil to Use” for more information.
Engine Oil Additives/Engine Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are
all that is needed for good performance and engine
protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System, a computer
system that indicates when to change the engine oil
and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and
engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on
driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system
to work properly, the system must be reset every time
the oil is changed.
5-19
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46. Change
the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the best
conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that
an oil change is necessary for over a year. However,
the engine oil and filter must be changed at least
once a year and at this time the system must be reset.
Your dealer/retailer has trained service people who
will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
5-20
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to
a CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on,
reset the system.
After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press the information and reset buttons on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) at the same time
to enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-52.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes until the
DIC display shows OIL-LIFE RESET.
4. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC
display shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This will tell you
the system has been reset.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(2.0L Turbo Engine)
5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
Engine Compartment Overview for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on
when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the reset procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 Scheduled Maintenance for
more information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
5-21
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
{ CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into the engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
5-22
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required. Never use compressed air to clean
the filter.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector.
3. Loosen the screws on the clamps holding the air
outlet duct in place. Do not remove the clamps.
4. Remove the air outlet duct.
5. To remove the filter cover, unlatch the clamps,
then pull up on the front and pull out.
6. Remove filter and inspect or replace.
Wipe all dust from inside of the housing and inspect
the air cleaner and air outlet duct for cracks, cuts,
and deterioration. The air outlet duct must be
replaced if damaged.
7. Reinstall the filter cover and latch the clamps.
8. Reattach the air outlet duct and tighten the screws
on the clamps that hold the duct in place.
9. Reconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector.
5-23
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(2.2L Engine)
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
{ CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into the engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
5-24
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required. Never use compressed air to clean
the filter.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to a dealer/
retailer and have it repaired as soon as possible.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the
Maintenance Schedule. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4. Be sure to use the transmission fluid listed
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12.
To inspect or replace the filter, remove the screws that
hold the cover on and lift off the cover. Be sure to
reinstall the cover tightly.
5-25
Manual Transmission Fluid
Cooling System
It is not necessary to check the manual transmission
fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason
for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to a
dealer/retailer for service. Have it repaired as soon as
possible. You may also have the fluid level checked
by your dealer/retailer when the oil is changed.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12
for the proper fluid to use.
The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. This system does not have its own
reservoir. It receives fluid from the brake master cylinder
reservoir.
See Brakes on page 5-35 for more information.
2.2L L4 Engine shown, 2.0L L4 Engine similar
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
5-26
CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5-27
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 5-32
What to Use
{ CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-28
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core,
and other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or
above the COLD FILL mark, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at
the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system
is cool before this is done.
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.
If it is not, you may have a leak in the cooling system.
How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank
{ CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
5-29
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
5-30
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper
radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure
cap slowly counterclockwise about two or
two and one-half turns. If you hear a hiss, wait for
that to stop. This will allow any pressure still left
to be vented out the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
start the engine and let it run until you can feel
the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for
the engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower than
the COLD FILL line, add more of the proper mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches
the COLD FILL line.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
See your dealer/retailer, if necessary.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the COLD FILL line on the tank. Wait about
five minutes, then check to see if the level is below
the COLD FILL line. If the level is below the line,
add additional coolant to bring the level up to
the line. Repeat this procedure until the level
remains constant at the COLD FILL line for at least
five minutes.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
5-31
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has an indicator to warn of engine
overheating.
You will find an engine coolant temperature warning
light on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3-32 for
more information.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-8.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run
the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire because of being
driven with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
5-32
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
{ CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is
no sign of steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
Stops after high-speed driving.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
Tows a trailer.
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral) for
automatic transmission or NEUTRAL for manual
transmission, while stopped. If it is safe to do
so, pull off the road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral)
and let the engine idle.
5-33
Windshield Washer Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-34
Notice:
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master
cylinder and, on manual
transmission vehicles, the
clutch hydraulic system use
the same reservoir filled
with DOT 3 brake fluid.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid. Adding fluid does
not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the brake
linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when new
brake linings are installed. Add or remove fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake/clutch
hydraulic system.
{ CAUTION:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on
the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned, and the vehicle
could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake and/or clutch hydraulic
system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-29.
• A fluid leak in the brake and/or clutch hydraulic
system can also cause a low fluid level. Have the
brake and/or clutch hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later the brakes and/or
clutch will not work well.
5-35
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
{ CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake or clutch
hydraulic system, the brakes or clutch might not
work well. This could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
or clutch hydraulic system parts. For example,
just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake or clutch hydraulic
system can damage brake or clutch hydraulic
system parts so badly that they will have
to be replaced. Do not let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
5-36
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-113.
Brake Wear
This vehicle has front disc brakes and could have rear
drum brakes or rear disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound can
come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle
is moving, except when applying the brake pedal firmly.
{ CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-124.
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes, they do not have
wear indicators, but if a rear brake rubbing noise is
heard, have the rear brake linings inspected
immediately. Rear brake drums should be removed and
inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation
or changing. When the front brake pads are replaced,
have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every moderate brake stop, the disc brakes adjust for
wear. If rarely making moderate or heavier brake stops,
the brakes might not adjust correctly. Very carefully
making a few moderate brake stops about every
1,000 miles (1 600 km) will adjust the brakes properly.
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes and the brake pedal
goes down farther than normal, the rear drum brakes
might need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up and
firmly applying the brakes a few times.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and
new ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes
might not work properly. For example, if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle,
the balance between the front and rear brakes can
change — for the worse. The braking performance
expected can change in many other ways if the wrong
replacement brake parts are installed.
5-37
Battery
Vehicle Storage
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label.
{ CAUTION:
The battery is located in the trunk. Access to the battery
is not necessary to jump start the vehicle. See Jump
Starting on page 5-39.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-39 for tips
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
or use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
5-38
Jump Starting
If the vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start the
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start the vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by the warranty. Always turn off the radio
and other accessories when jump starting the
vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
5-39
Locate the remote
negative (−) ground
terminal, marked GND (−),
which is located behind
the engine coolant
surge tank.
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
You will not see the battery of your vehicle under the
hood. It is located in the trunk. You will not need to
access your battery for jump starting. The vehicle has
a remote positive (+) and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal.
Locate the remote
positive (+) terminal which
is located under a red
tethered cap on the engine
compartment fuse block.
Lift the cap to access
the terminal.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on the location of the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminals on the
vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
5-40
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you don’t,
explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-41
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal location on the vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
5-42
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle
with the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) terminal marked GND (−).
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to its original
position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal (GND)
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-43
Headlamp Aiming
The optical headlamp aiming system has been preset at
the factory and should need no further adjustment
However, If the vehicle is damaged, the headlamp aim
may be affected and adjustment may be necessary.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim on the headlamps:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to be
re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
The vehicle should be:
• Placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a
light colored wall.
• On a perfectly level surface which is level all the
way to the wall.
• Placed so it is at a right angle to the wall.
• Clear of any snow, ice, or mud on it.
• Fully assembled, with the tires properly inflated, and
•
all other work stopped while headlamp aiming is
being done.
Normally loaded with a full tank of fuel, with the
spare tire in the proper location, and one person
or 160 lbs (75 kg) on the driver seat.
5-44
2. Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot
on the low-beam headlamp.
3. At the wall, measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 2 and mark it.
4. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall the
width of the vehicle at the height of the mark
in Step 3.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
5. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard in front of the headlamp not
being adjusted. Do not place it directly on the
headlamp. This allows only the beam of light from
the headlamp being adjusted to be seen on the
flat surface.
6. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
6 mm socket wrench.
7. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
5-45
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-52.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
8. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
incorrect headlamp aim.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for the opposite
headlamp.
5-46
{ CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
A. Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp
B. Sidemarker
C. Headlamp
2. Remove the two bolts from the headlamp assembly.
3. Remove the two fasteners from the fascia.
Assistance may be needed for Steps 4 and 5.
4. Pull the front fascia back.
5. Pull the headlamp assembly up at an angle and
towards the radiator to remove it.
5-47
7. Disconnect the wiring harness from the bulb socket.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
8. Remove the retainer by turning it counterclockwise.
To replace a CHMSL bulb:
6. Disconnect the bulb base from the wiring harness
by lifting the locking tab.
9. Turn the bulb socket for the headlamp, front
turn signal, or parking lamp counterclockwise.
For the sidemarker bulb, use a tool to assist
in turning the bulb socket.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Press the tabs to release the bulb assembly.
10. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.
11. Install a new bulb.
12. Reinstall the bulb assembly by reversing
Steps 1 through 9.
When reinstalling the headlamp assembly, first
make sure that the wiring harness is in its original
position. If not, the headlamp assembly will not
fit correctly.
Align the two tabs on the bottom of the assembly
that fit into two slots in the headlamp assembly
bracket.
3. Pull the bulb assembly down to access the bulbs.
4. Pull the old bulb straight out.
5-48
5. Push the new bulb straight in until it clicks.
6. Align the tabs in the bulb assembly with the
assembly in the trunk lid. Push the bulb assembly
back into place until it snaps in. You may need
to use a tool to guide the tabs into the assembly.
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps
(Coupe)
3. Disconnect the wiring harness by lifting up on the
tab to release and pull it straight out.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
straight out of the taillamp assembly.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulb socket.
6. Push the new bulb straight into the bulb socket until
it clicks.
7. Push the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly
and turn it clockwise to lock it into place.
8. Push the wiring harness straight into the bulb
socket and push down on the tab.
9. Reinstall the trunk trim and fastener.
To replace this bulb:
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the trunk trim and pull back fastener.
5-49
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps (Sedan)
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the trunk trim and pull back fastener.
3. Remove the additional fastener.
4. Remove the outer two screws from the taillamp
assembly.
5. Lift up on the tab and pull the wiring harness
straight out.
6. Remove the taillamp assembly from the quarter
panel.
A. Sidemarker
B. Stoplamp/Turn Signal/Taillamp
C. Back-up
7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
straight out.
8. Pull the old bulb straight out of the socket.
9. Push the new bulb straight into the socket.
10. Push the new bulb into the taillamp assembly and
turn it clockwise to lock it into place.
11. Reinstall the taillamp assembly into the quarter
panel.
5-50
12. Push the wiring harness straight into the taillamp
assembly and push the tab down.
13. Reinstall the outer two screws into the taillamp
assembly.
14. Reinstall the trunk trim and the fasteners.
Back-Up Lamps (Coupe)
To replace a back-up lamp bulb:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12.
2. Locate the back-up lamp bulb assembly in the
trunk lid.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
out of the lamp assembly.
On vehicles that have a back-up lamp cover, first
remove it by pressing the tab at the top.
4. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulb socket.
5. Push the new bulb straight into the bulb socket until
it clicks.
6. Push the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and
turn it clockwise to lock it into place.
5-51
License Plate Lamp
5. Push the bulb straight into the socket and turn
clockwise to reinstall.
To replace one of these bulbs:
6. Push and turn the license plate lamp away from
you through the opening.
7. Reinstall the two screws holding the license
plate lamp.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
Bulb Number
Back-Up Lamps
921
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
912
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps
3157KX
Halogen Headlamps,
High/Low-Beam
9007 LL
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license
plate lamps.
License Plate Lamp and
Sidemarker
194
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp toward you
through the opening.
Stoplamp, Taillamp and
Turn Signal Lamps
3057KX
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5-52
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Here is how to remove the wiper blades:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. For proper type and
length, see Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-14.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-53
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about the tire warranty and
where to obtain service, see the vehicle warranty
booklet for details. For additional information
refer to the tire manufacturer.
{ CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 4-26.
CAUTION:
5-54
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your vehicle’s
tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-62.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the recommended
pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle’s tires have been damaged,
replace them.
Low-Profile Performance Tire
Winter Tires
If the vehicle has 225/40R18 size tires, they are
classified as low-profile performance tires.
These tires are designed for very responsive driving
on wet or dry pavement. You may also notice more
road noise with low-profile performance tires and
that they tend to wear faster.
The 225/40R18 tire is a high performance tire
designed for dry traction and handling performance
which may result in reduced tread life of
15,000 miles (24 140 km) or less depending on
individual driving behavior.
If the vehicle has 225/40R18 size tires, they are
classified as performance tires. These tires are designed
for very responsive driving on wet or dry pavement.
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for the vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance
on most surfaces but they may not offer the traction you
would like or the same level of performance as winter
tires on snow or ice covered roads.
Notice: If the vehicle has low-profile tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage
can occur when coming into contact with
road hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged
objects, or when sliding into a curb. The
vehicle warranty does not cover this type of
damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation
pressure and, when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After
switching to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
handling and braking.
See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
New Tires on page 5-72.
5-55
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on
all four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size,
load range, and speed rating as the original
equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
5-56
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines. If your vehicle has
205/55R16 size tires, they meet the GM TPC
Spec rating, but the TPC Spec code has not been
molded onto the tire’s sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.
For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-74.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
5-57
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire on page 5-109 and If a Tire
Goes Flat on page 5-79.
5-58
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-62.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,
as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high
as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. A tire size
without the letter P as the first character is certified
to European standards.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.
5-59
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See Loading
the Vehicle on page 4-26.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-26.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-26.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-62.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
5-60
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-26.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-62 and
Loading the Vehicle on page 4-26.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
5-61
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 5-71.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-74.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-26.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Vehicle on page 4-26.
5-62
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label,
see Loading the Vehicle on page 4-26. How you
load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and
ride comfort. Never load your vehicle with more
weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one. It should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).
For additional information regarding the compact
spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-109.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-63
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). This system uses radio and sensor technology
to check tire pressure levels. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s tires and
transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in
the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
5-64
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-65
for additional information.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and
comply with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. If your vehicle has
this feature, TPMS sensors are mounted onto each
tire and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and
wheel assembly, if the vehicle has one. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires
and transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS turns on the low tire
pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can
be viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-44 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.
5-65
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are
cold. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-26, for an
example of the Tire and Loading Information label and
its location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-62.
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-70 and Tires on page 5-54.
Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using
an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved tire
sealant available through your dealer/retailer.
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits use a GM approved
liquid tire sealant. Using non-approved tire sealants
could damage the TPMS sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 5-80 for information regarding
the inflator kit materials and instructions.
5-66
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for
the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause the malfunction light and
DIC message to come on are:
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire, if the vehicle has one. The spare tire
does not have a TPMS sensor. The TPMS
malfunction light and DIC message should go off
once you re-install the road tire containing the
TPMS sensor.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on
page 5-72.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service
if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
need to be matched to the new tire/wheel location.
The sensors are matched, to the tire/wheel locations,
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure
use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match any
tire and wheel position, the matching process stops
and you need to start over.
5-67
TPMS Matching Process for Vehicles
with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter’s lock and unlock buttons, at the same
time, for about five seconds to start the TPMS
learn mode. The horn sounds twice indicating the
TPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode.
4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side
front turn signal also comes on to indicate that
corner’s sensor is ready to be learned.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for about
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then
all the turn signals flash one time to confirm
the sensor identification code has been matched to
the tire/wheel position.
6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
5-68
7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound to
indicate the tire learning process is done. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS learn
mode, or if communication with the receiver stops,
or if the time limit has expired, turn the ignition
switch to LOCK/OFF and start over beginning
with Step 2.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
TPMS Matching Process for Vehicles
without Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Using the Driver Information Center (DIC), press the
INFO and Set/Reset buttons at the same time for
about one second. Then press and release the INFO
button until the TIRE LEARN? message displays.
4. Press and hold the Set/Reset DIC button for
approximately three seconds to start the TPMS
learn mode. The horn sounds twice to indicate the
TPMS receiver is ready and the TIRE LEARN
ON message displays. The driver side front turn
signal also comes on to indicate that corner sensor
is ready to be learned.
5. Start with the driver side front tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for about
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then
all the turn signals flash one time to confirm
the sensor identification code has been matched to
the tire/wheel position.
7. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat
the procedure in Step 6.
8. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat
the procedure in Step 6.
9. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to indicate
that corner sensor is ready to be learned. Proceed to
the driver side rear tire, and repeat the procedure
in Step 6.
10. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver side
rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound to indicate
the tire learning process is done. The LEARN
COMPLETE message displays if all four tire
positions are learned. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF.
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS learn
mode, or if communication with the receiver stops,
or if the time limit has expired, the TIRE LEARN?
message displays on the DIC. Turn the ignition switch
to LOCK/OFF and start over beginning with Step 2.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
5-69
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect the
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, for signs of wear or damage.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-71
for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
If this vehicle has P225/40R18 size tires, they
should be rotated every 3,000 miles (5 000 km).
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to
achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that the vehicle continues to
perform most like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-71
and Wheel Replacement on page 5-76.
5-70
When rotating the vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-62 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-26.
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), reset the TPMS sensors after
rotating the tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 5-65.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-124.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed,
to get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a
Flat Tire on page 5-88.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
5-71
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires
for your vehicle. The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it was new,
were designed to meet General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
system rating. If you need replacement tires,
GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
5-72
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all-season tread design, the
TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for
mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 5-56 for additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep your vehicle performing most like it
did when the tires were new. Replacing less
than a full set of tires can affect the braking
and handling performance of your vehicle.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-70
for information on proper tire rotation.
{ CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial and bias-belted
tires), the vehicle may not handle properly,
and you could have a crash. Using tires of
different sizes, brands, or types may also
cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the correct size, brand, and type of
tires on all wheels. It is all right to drive
with your compact spare temporarily, as it
was developed for use on your vehicle.
See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-109.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may
give a low-pressure warning that is higher or lower
than the proper warning level you would get
with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 5-64.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-26, for more
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
5-73
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability,
and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes, traction
control, and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
{ CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-72 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
5-74
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law. It should be
noted that the temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
5-75
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
Wheel Replacement
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle.
5-76
Used Replacement Wheels
{ CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how far it
has been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause a
crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new
GM original equipment wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-88 for more
information.
5-77
Tire Chains
CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P195/65R15, P205/55R16,
P205/50R17, or 225/40R18 size tires, do not use
tire chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there is not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire chains could cause
you to lose control of your vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination, and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION:
5-78
(Continued)
(Continued)
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive
slowly, readjust, or remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your
vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P195/65R15, P205/55R16, P205/50R17 or 225/40R18
size tires, use tire chains only where legal and
only when you must. Use only SAE Class S-type
chains that are the proper size for your tires.
Install them on the front tires and tighten them as
tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened.
Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast
or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage
your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain the tires properly. See Tires
on page 5-54. If air goes out of a tire, It is much more
likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have
a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and
what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.
Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place and stopping.
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Inspect the flat tire.
{ CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a
tire sealant and compressor kit. To use the jack and
spare tire, see Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-88.
To use the tire sealant and compressor kit, see Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 5-80.
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
2. Park the vehicle. Set the parking brake firmly and
put the shift lever in P (Park).
5-79
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information,
see Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.
{ CAUTION:
Over-inflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the tire sealant and compressor kit
instructions and inflate the tire to its recommended
pressure. Do not exceed the recommended
pressure.
5-80
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger compartment of
the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could strike someone.
Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit,
there may not be a spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not be a place to
store a tire.
The tire sealant and compressor can be used to
temporarily seal punctures up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate
an under inflated tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire
is too severely damaged for the tire sealant and
compressor kit to be effective. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-8.
Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor
kit instructions.
Tire Sealant
The kit includes:
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the
label adhered to the sealant canister.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before
its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
There is only enough sealant to seal one tire.
After usage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
A. Air Compressor
B. Tire Sealant
Canister
C. Power Plug
D. On/Off Button
E. Pressure Gage
F. Air Only Hose
(Black)
G. Sealant/Air Hose
(Clear)
5-81
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 5-79. Do not remove any objects that have
penetrated the tire.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its
storage location. See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit Storage on page 5-88.
Make sure the on/off button (D) is in the off (O)
position.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) and the power
plug (C).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during
cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environment
for 5 minutes. This will help to inflate the tire faster.
5-82
6. Plug the power plug (C) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 3-16.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not
use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while
using the air compressor.
8. Press the on/off (D) button to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit on.
The compressor will inject sealant and air into
the tire.
The pressure gage (E) will initially show a high
pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant
into the tire. Once the sealant is completely
dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop
and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only.
9. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure
using the pressure gage (E). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-62.
The pressure gage (E) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may be turned on/off
until the correct pressure is reached.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle
should not be driven farther. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot inflate the tire. Remove the
power plug from the accessory power outlet
and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-8.
10. Press the on/off button (D) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air
until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is
distributed in the tire, therefore, Steps 11 through
17 must be done immediately after Step 10.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
11. Unplug the power plug (C) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
12. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) counterclockwise to
remove it from the tire valve stem.
5-83
13. Replace the tire valve stem cap.
14. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), and the power
plug (C) back in their original location.
15. If the flat tire was
able to inflate to the
recommended inflation
pressure, remove
the maximum speed
label from the sealant
canister (B) and
place it in a highly
visible location.
18. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure.
Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under “Using the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to
Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured).”
If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi
(68 kPa) below the recommended inflation pressure,
stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-8.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, inflate the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
19. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire or vehicle.
The label is a reminder not to exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until the damaged tire is repaired
or replaced.
20. Dispose of the used sealant canister (B) and
sealant/air hose (F) assembly at a local
dealer/retailer or in accordance with local state
codes and practices.
16. Return the equipment to its original storage location
in the vehicle.
21. Replace it with a new canister available from your
dealer/retailer.
17. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant in the tire.
22. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer/retailer within a 100 miles (161 km) of driving
to have the tire repaired or replaced.
5-84
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
3. Pull the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B).
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:
5. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the power plug (C) from the air
compressor (A).
6. Remove the tire valve stem cap by turning it
counterclockwise.
7. Attach the air only hose (F) onto the tire valve stem
and press the lever down to secure it.
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 5-79.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its
storage location. See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit Storage on page 5-88.
8. Plug the power plug (C) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 3-16.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not
use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
9. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while
using the air compressor.
2. Unlock the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B) by pulling up on the lever.
5-85
10. Press the on/off (D) button to turn the compressor on.
The compressor will inflate the tire with air only.
11. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure
using the pressure gage (E). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-62.
The pressure gage (E) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate reading.
The compressor may be turned on/off until the
correct pressure is reached.
Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister
To remove the sealant canister:
12. Press the on/off button (D) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
13. Unplug the power plug (C) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
14. Disconnect the air only hose (F) from the tire valve
stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
15. Replace the air only hose (F) and the power plug (C)
back in its original location.
16. Place the equipment in the original storage location
in the vehicle.
5-86
1. Unlock the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B) by pulling up on the lever.
2. Pull the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B).
3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) from the
compressor (A).
To install a new sealant canister:
1. Align the sealant/air hose (F) with the slot in the
air compressor.
2. Push the sealant canister (B) down and turn it
clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (F) around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose (F) onto the
sealant canister inlet and push the lever down.
4. Turn the sealant canister (B) so the inflator filling
hose is aligned with the slot in the compressor.
5. Lift the sealant canister (B) from the compressor
and replace with a new sealant canister. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
5-87
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Storage
The tire sealant and compressor kit is located in the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6.
2. Lift the trunk liner.
{ CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual transmission
to 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
CAUTION:
3. Remove the retainer that holds the tire sealant and
compressor kit.
4. Remove the kit from the foam container.
To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse
the steps.
5-88
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
5-89
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is located in the trunk.
Base Models
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12.
2. Lift the trunk liner to access the spare tire and tools.
5-90
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Cover
Retainer
Spare Tire
Wing Nut
Jack and Wheel Wrench
Bolt
Uplevel Models
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12.
3. Remove the retainer (B) that holds down the spare
tire. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-109 for
more information.
4. Remove the spare tire (C) by gently pulling it up
and out of the trunk.
5. Remove the wing nut (D) that holds the jack and
remove the jack and wheel wrench (E).
2. Lift the trunk liner to access the spare tire and tools.
5-91
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Retainer
Jack and Wheel Wrench
Spare Tire
Foam Support
Bolt
3. Remove the retainer (A) that holds down the jack,
wheel wrench (B) and spare tire (C).
4. Remove the spare tire by gently pulling it up and
out of the trunk.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A) and
wheel wrench (B).
5-92
You will need to turn the plastic wheel nut
counterclockwise to loosen the wheel wrench
from the jack.
Press the button and then pull on the end of the wheel
wrench to extend the handle.
5-93
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
(All Models Except SS)
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 5-88.
3. If necessary, use the flat end of the wheel wrench
to pry along the edge of the wheel cover until it
comes off.
Store the wheel cover in the trunk until the flat tire
is repaired or replaced.
4. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
2. If your vehicle has plastic wheel covers, use the
wheel wrench to loosen the plastic wheel nut caps.
Once the plastic wheel nut caps have been
loosened with the wheel wrench, you can finish
loosening them with your fingers. The plastic
nut caps do not come off.
5-94
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
5. Position the jack lift head at the jack location
nearest the flat tire. The front location is about
8 inches (20 cm) behind the front wheel opening.
The rear location is about 4 inches (10 cm) in front
of the rear wheel opening.
6. Raise the jack head until it fits firmly in the
vehicle’s frame, where the notch is located,
nearest the flat tire.
7. Put the compact spare tire near the flat tire.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
5-95
10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
9. Remove all of the
wheel nuts and
flat tire.
11. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after
time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-88.
5-96
{ CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
12. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
{ CAUTION:
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-124 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-124 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
4-Wheel Nuts
5-Wheel Nuts
14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, the cover or the spare could
be damaged.
5-97
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire (SS Model)
The SS Model has larger performance brakes than
the base model. The compact spare tire will not clear
the front brakes.
To change the rear road tire:
Rear Tire Changing Procedure
1. Do a safety check before proceeding.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-88 for more
information.
Do not use the compact spare tire in the event of a
front flat tire.
You must use the rear tire to replace the front flat tire.
2. If your vehicle has plastic wheel covers, use the
wheel wrench to loosen the plastic wheel nut caps.
Once the plastic wheel nut caps have been
loosened with the wheel wrench, you can finish
loosening them with your fingers. The plastic
nut caps do not come off.
5-98
3. If necessary, use the flat end of the wheel wrench
to pry along the edge of the rear wheel cover until it
comes off.
Store the wheel cover in the trunk until the flat tire
is repaired or replaced.
4. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the rear wheel
nuts. Do not remove them yet.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
6. Raise the jack head until it fits firmly in the vehicle’s
frame, where the notch is located, nearest the flat tire.
7. Put the compact spare tire near the rear tire.
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into
the proper location before raising the vehicle.
5. Position the jack lift head at the rear jack location
nearest the rear tire. The rear location is about
4 inches (10 cm) in front of the rear wheel opening.
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
5-99
9. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
10. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
{ CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after
time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-88.
5-100
11. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut
by hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
13. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
12. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
{ CAUTION:
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-124 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
5-Wheel Nuts
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be
damaged.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-124 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
5-101
To change the front flat tire:
Front Flat Tire Changing Procedure:
1. Perform a rear tire change by removing the rear tire
and installing the compact spare tire in the rear
wheel location. The rear road tire will be used
to replace the front flat tire. See Rear Tire Changing
Procedure in this section.
2. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 5-88.
Once the plastic wheel nut caps have been
loosened with the wheel wrench, you can finish
loosening them with your fingers. The plastic
nut caps do not come off.
4. If necessary, use the flat end of the wheel wrench
to pry along the edge of the wheel cover until it
comes off.
Store the wheel cover in the trunk until the flat tire
is repaired or replaced.
5. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts
on the flat tire. Do not remove them yet.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
3. If your vehicle has plastic wheel covers, use the
wheel wrench to loosen the plastic wheel nut caps.
5-102
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
6. Position the jack lift head at the jack location
nearest the flat tire. The front location is about
8 inches (20 cm) behind the front wheel opening.
7. Raise the jack head until it fits firmly in the vehicle’s
frame, where the notch is located, nearest the
flat tire.
8. Put the tire near the flat tire.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into
the proper location before raising the vehicle.
9. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
5-103
10. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
5-104
11. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
12. Place the tire on the wheel-mounting surface.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after
time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-88.
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
13. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
14. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-105
15. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
{ CAUTION:
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-124 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-124 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
5-106
5-Wheel Nuts
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the
compact spare, the cover or the spare could be
damaged.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Cover
Retainer
Jack and Wheel Wrench
Stow Bolt Extension Rod
Flat Tire
Bolt
Base Model
5-107
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Cover
Retainer
Jack and Wheel Wrench
Stow Bolt Extension Rod
Flat Tire
Foam Support
Bolt
To store a flat tire and tools:
1. Remove the stow bolt extension rod and sleeve
from the jack.
2. Screw the stow bolt extension rod and the sleeve
into the existing spare tire hold-down bolt.
3. If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, first remove
the center cap with your hand or the wheel wrench.
4. Place the flat tire face down into the spare tire tub.
5. Re-attach the wheel wrench to the jack.
6. Place the jack into the center of the flat tire, being
careful not to scratch the inside of the wheel.
7. Remove the plastic sleeve from the stow bolt
extension rod. Secure the jack and road wheel
using the larger plastic retainer.
8. If used in the vehicle, place the smaller jack
retainer nut in a safe place until you are ready
to store the compact spare tire in the trunk again.
Uplevel Model
5-108
To store the compact spare tire and tools, follow the
previous procedure without using the stow bolt extension
rod and see Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on
page 5-90 and follow the removal procedure, in reverse,
for the proper jack storage instructions for this vehicle.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare with a full-size tire as soon
as possible.
Compact Spare Tire
{ CAUTION:
Driving with more than one compact spare tire at a
time could result in loss of braking and handling.
This could lead to a crash and you or others could
be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at
a time.
This vehicle may have a compact spare tire. Although the
compact spare tire was fully inflated when the vehicle
was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation
pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, if the
vehicle has one, stop as soon as possible and make
sure the spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact
spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have the full-size
tire repaired or replaced at your convenience. Of course,
it is best to replace the spare with a full-size tire as
soon as possible. The spare tire will last longer and be
in good shape in case it is needed again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take the vehicle through an automatic car
wash with guide rails. The compact spare can
get caught on the rails which can damage the tire,
wheel and other parts of the vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare.
5-109
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause
stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also
transfer color to the vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
5-110
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
To clean:
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be
used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any
soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or club
soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the
soil as possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
and then vacuum.
5-111
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of the leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt.
Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces.
5-112
Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
the vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-113.
5-113
Finish Care
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever
possible.
5-114
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels and Trim
The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim
may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because they could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome
polish on chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive
a vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car wash that uses
silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes.
5-115
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
5-116
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is in the trunk, on the driver side, near the
spare tire cover. It is very helpful if parts need to
be ordered. The label has the following information:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on a
plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and
the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps identify the vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine
Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-124 for the vehicle’s engine code.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
the vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-72.
5-117
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses. Should the
headlamps fail to function, have the headlamp system
checked right away.
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by electrical problems.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.
When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
5-118
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of the vehicle that you
can get along without — like the radio or cigarette
lighter — and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in the vehicle: the floor
console fuse block and the engine compartment fuse
block.
There is one additional fuse located in the back of the
vehicle near the battery.
Floor Console Fuse Block
Fuses
The floor console fuse block is located on the passenger
side of the floor console behind the forward panel.
The panel has three clips. Pull the panel to disconnect
the three clips, and access the fuses. Use the fuse
puller to remove fuses.
Usage
1
Fuse Puller
2
Empty
3
Empty
4
Empty
5
Empty
6
Amplifier
5-119
Fuses
5-120
Usage
Fuses
Usage
7
Cluster
8
Ignition Switch, PASS-Key® III+
25
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
9
Stoplamp
26
Door Locks
10
Heating, Ventilation, Air
Conditioning, PASS-Key® III+
27
Interior Lights
28
Steering Wheel Control Illumination
11
Empty
12
Spare
29
Power Windows
13
Airbag
Relays
14
Spare
30
Climate Control System
15
Windshield Wiper
31
Empty
16
Climate Control System, Ignition
32
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
17
Window Retained Accessory Power
18
Empty
19
Electric Power Steering, Steering
Wheel Control
20
Sunroof
21
Spare
22
Empty
23
Audio System
24
XM Radio™, OnStar™
Usage
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver side of the vehicle. Lift off the cover to check the
fuses. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Fuses
Usage
SPARES
Spares
ABS
Antilock Brake System
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
REAR DEFOG
Rear Defogger
COOL FAN2
Engine Cooling Fan High Speed
CRNK
Starter
COOL FAN 1
Engine Cooling Fan Low Speed
BCM3
Body Control Module 3
BCM2
Body Control Module 2
FOG LAMP
Fog Lamps
HORN
Horn
RT HI BEAM
Passenger Side High Beam Lamp
LT HI BEAM
Driver Side High Beam Lamp
RT LO BEAM
Passenger Side Low Beam Lamp
LT LO BEAM
Driver Side Low Beam Lamp
DRL
Daytime Running Lamps
FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump
5-121
Fuses
Usage
EXH
Exhaust Emissions
ENG VLV SOL
Engine Valve Solenoid
INJ
Injectors
AIR SOL
AIR Solenoid
Blank
PCM/ECM
Fuses
Usage
Blank
Blank
ECM/TRANS
Engine Control Module,
Transmission
BCK UP
Back-Up Lamps
Blank
TRUNK/ HTD
SEATS
Trunk, Heated Seats
Powertrain Control Module/Engine
Control Module
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
EPS
Electric Power Steering
AIR PUMP
AIR Pump
SDM
Sensing Diagnostic Module
(Airbags)
PRK LAMP
Parking Lamps
ABS3
Antilock Brake System 3
WPR
Windshield Wiper
OUTLET
Auxiliary Power Outlet
IP IGN
Ignition
MIR
Mirrors
A/C CLTCH
Air Conditioning Clutch
DLC
Data Link Connector
CHMSL
Center High Mount Stop Lamp
CNSTR VENT
Canister Vent
ABS2
Antilock Brake System 2
5-122
Relays
REAR DEFOG
Usage
Rear Defogger
Relays
Usage
PWR/TRN
Powertrain
AIR PUMP
AIR Pump
A/C CLTCH
Air Conditioning Clutch
Windshield Wiper High/Low Speed
CHMSL
Center High Mount Stop Lamp
CRNK
Starter
RUN/CRNK
Run, Crank
COOL FAN 2
(TURBO:
COOL FANS)
Engine Cooling Fan (L61, LE5)/
Engine Cooling Fans (LNF)
FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump
WPR ON/OFF
Windshield Wiper On/Off
COOL FAN 1
Engine Cooling Fan 1
AIR SOL
(TURBO:
COOL FAN 2)
AIR Solenoid (L61)/Engine Cooling
Fan 2 (LNF)
WPR HI/LO
Misc.
PLR
Usage
Fuse Puller
5-123
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Capacities
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Cooling System
2.0L L4 Engine
9.2 qt
8.7 L
2.2L L4 Engine
7.4 qt
7.0 L
2.0L L4 Engine
5.0 qt
4.7 L
2.2L L4 Engine
5.0 qt
4.7 L
2.0L L4 Engine
13.2 gal
50.0 L
2.2L L4 Engine (with NU6 emissions)
13.5 gal
51.1 L
2.2L L4 Engine (without NU6 emissions)
13.0 gal
49.2 L
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
5-124
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Automatic Transmission
7.0 qt
6.6 L
Manual Transmission, 2.0L L4 Engine
2.0 qt
1.9 L
Transmission Fluid (Complete Drain and Refill)
Manual Transmission, 2.2L L4 Engine
Wheel Nut Torque
1.7 qt
1.6 L
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Engine Specifications
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
2.0L L4 Engine
Engine
X
Manual
0.035 in (0.89 mm)
2.2L L4 Engine
H
Automatic
Manual
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5-125
✍ NOTES
5-126
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-14
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-15
Maintenance Record .....................................6-16
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance
is important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the
level of emissions from the vehicle. To help protect
the environment, and to keep the vehicle in good
condition, be sure to maintain the vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer
for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep this vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
6-2
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all the
time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use the
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive
it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-26.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{ CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 5-4.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, have your dealer/retailer
do these jobs.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine parts.
To purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-17.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells what
should be checked, when to check it, and what
can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 6-14. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
6-3
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message displays in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), service is required
for the vehicle. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-46. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the
engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle
service is necessary for over a year. However,
the engine oil and filter must be changed at least
once a year and at this time the system must be reset.
Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicians
who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset
the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since the last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
System on page 5-19 for information on the Engine
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that the first service be
Maintenance I, the second service be Maintenance II,
and then alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II may
be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
OIL SOON message displays within 10 months since
the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the CHANGE OIL SOON
message displays 10 months or more since the
last service or if the message has not come on at all
for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter (2.0L Turbo Engine) on page 5-21 or Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(2.2L Engine) on page 5-24. See footnote (k).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-70 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on
page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels. Add fluid as needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (l).
•
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (2.0L Turbo
Engine) on page 5-21 or Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter (2.2L Engine) on page 5-24.
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service only). See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
•
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
•
6-6
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or
cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums,
wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts
or signs of wear. Inspect power steering cables for
proper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems
on page 1-74.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and
latches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lid hinges
and latches. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak.
(g) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-53 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on
page 5-114 for more information.
6-7
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
If the vehicle is not used under any of these conditions,
the fluid and filter do not require changing.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer perform
this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-28 for what to
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,
dependability, and emission control performance.
Your dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and
services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
(k) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
(l) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
6-8
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Year
®
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-28.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are inflated
to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check the spare
tire, if the vehicle has one. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-62. If the vehicle has a spare tire, check to
make sure it is stored securely. See Changing a Flat Tire
on page 5-88.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-70.
Starter Switch Check
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-31.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. For automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in
P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any
other position, contact your dealer/retailer for service.
For manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in Neutral, push the clutch pedal down halfway,
and try to start the engine. The vehicle should start
only when the clutch pedal is pushed down all
the way to the floor. If the vehicle starts when the
clutch pedal is not pushed all the way down, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
6-9
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
{ CAUTION:
• For automatic transmission vehicles, the ignition
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
• For manual transmission vehicles, the ignition key
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-31.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
6-10
should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in P (Park). The ignition key should come
out only in LOCK/OFF.
should come out only in LOCK/OFF.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.
It should only lock when turned to the right.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park).
Then release the parking brake followed by
the regular brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit,
check the sealant expiration date printed on the
instruction label of the kit at least once a year.
See your dealer/retailer for a replacement canister.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in N (Neutral),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
6-11
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Engine Cooling water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
System
page 5-28.
Hydraulic Brake DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
System
in Canada 89021320).
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
(2.2L L4
engine)
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-15.
Hydraulic
Clutch System
The engine requires a special engine
oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard can be
identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Engine Oil (2.0L Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
L4 engine)
However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. Look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM4718M. For the proper viscosity,
see Engine Oil on page 5-15.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Manual
Transmission
(2.2L L4
engine)
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,
in Canada 88861801).
6-12
Windshield
Washer
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
in Canada 89021320).
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Manual
Transmission
(2.0L L4
engine)
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88862472,
in Canada 88862473).
Automatic
Transmission
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood and
Door Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Manual
Transmission
Shift Linkage
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
6-13
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
2.0L L4 Engine
15909459
A3099C
2.2L L4 Engine
22731072
A3054C
Engine Oil Filter
12605566
PF457G
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
52493319
CF125
2.0L L4 Engine
12620540
41-108
2.2L L4 Engine
12625058
41-103
Driver Side — 22 in (56 cm)
15243233
—
Passenger Side — 17 in (43 cm)
15243232
—
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Spark Plugs
Wiper Blades
6-14
Engine Drive Belt Routing
Dotted line shows routing for vehicles without air
conditioning.
6-15
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-5
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY) Users .........................7-6
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-7
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-8
Scheduling Service Appointments ....................7-10
Courtesy Transportation .................................7-11
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-13
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-16
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-17
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-18
Event Data Recorders ...................................7-18
OnStar® ......................................................7-19
Navigation System ........................................7-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-19
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the general
manager.
7-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, in the U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General
Motors of Canada Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest following Step One first.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if
you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can
file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
7-3
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event
that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be
aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/
Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada
Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner
disputes involving factory-related vehicle service claims.
The program provides for the review of the facts involved
by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of
charge.
7-4
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
•
•
•
•
•
Online service and maintenance records
Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
Exclusive privileges and offers
Recall notices for your specific vehicle
®
OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred
GM dealers/retailers.
• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• Contact Us
7-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its
Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the
U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can
dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
7-6
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your
vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-7
Roadside Assistance Program
Coverage
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
7-8
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner
or driver if they decide the claims are made too often,
or the same type of claim is made many times.
Services Provided
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer
for warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash
and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given when
the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated.
It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental
expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain warranty
period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and
rental car.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
7-9
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.
Propane and other fuels are not provided through
this service.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the most scenic route.
There is a limit of six requests per year.
Additional travel information is also available.
Allow three weeks for delivery.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited
requires pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,
and a copy of the repair orders. Once authorization
has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements and explain how to
receive payment.
7-10
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle
for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Courtesy Transportation
Transportation Options
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and
hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and Canada.
Warranty service can generally be completed while
you wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
7-11
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
and public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement
of fuel or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty
repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited and must
be supported by original receipts. This requires that you
sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state/
provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.
7-12
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may
also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to
ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM
New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the
vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety performance, however,
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure
related to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
7-13
Insuring Your Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection
to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage
is not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged
at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in
your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-8 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-14
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy
of the report for a nominal fee. In some states/
provinces with “no fault” insurance laws, a report
may not be necessary. This is especially true if there
are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
your vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer
or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
with their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair.
If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take
your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the
facility that any required replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts
or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts
will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
7-15
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from safercar.gov.
7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors
of Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin
contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis
and service of your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
7-17
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a
crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to
help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may
store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
consumption or average speed. These modules may also
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
7-18
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee;
in response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions for information on data collection and
use. See also OnStar® System on page 2-39 in
this manual for more information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not
use or record personal information or link with any
other GM system containing personal information.
7-19
✍ NOTES
7-20
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Accessory Power ............................................ 2-23
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-16
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................... 1-73
Additional Required Services,
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-6
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-117
Adjustments
Headlamp Range .......................................... 1-7
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ......................... 5-21, 5-24
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-18
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment .................... 3-22
Airbag
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-26
Airbag System ................................................ 1-54
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 1-73
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-59
Passenger Sensing System ................... 1-61, 1-67
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-72
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-59
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-60
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-58
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-56
Airbags
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-27
Antenna
Fixed Mast ................................................. 3-92
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ... 3-92
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-5
Warning Light ............................................. 3-30
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-115
Care of Safety Belts ................................... 5-112
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-116
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................. 5-113
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-111
Finish Care ............................................... 5-114
Finish Damage .......................................... 5-116
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 5-112
Interior Cleaning ........................................ 5-110
Leather .................................................... 5-112
Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-116
Tires ........................................................ 5-116
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-116
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-113
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-113
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 5-114
Ashtray ......................................................... 3-17
Assistance Program, Roadside ........................... 7-8
1
Audio System .................................................
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................
Setting the Clock .........................................
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............
Audio System(s) .............................................
Audio Systems
Radio Reception ..........................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Automatic Door Lock .......................................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
3-58
3-90
3-59
3-92
3-60
3-91
3-90
2-10
5-25
2-26
B
Back-Up Lamps - Ambulancce Body
Bulb Replacement .......................................
Battery ..........................................................
Electric Power Management ..........................
Run-Down Protection ...................................
Belt Routing, Engine .......................................
Bluetooth® .....................................................
Boost Gage ...................................................
2
5-51
5-38
3-15
3-16
6-15
3-80
3-38
Brake
Emergencies ................................................ 4-6
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-35
Brakes .......................................................... 5-35
Antilock ....................................................... 4-5
Parking ...................................................... 2-31
System Warning Light .................................. 3-29
Braking ........................................................... 4-4
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-6
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-20
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-52
Back-Up Lamps - Ambulance Body ................ 5-51
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-48
Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-14
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-46
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-44
Headlamps ................................................. 5-46
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-47
License Plate Lamps .................................... 5-52
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps .................. 5-49
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-50
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-72
C
California
Perchlorate Materials Requirements ................. 5-4
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-124
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust ........................................... 2-35
Trunk ......................................................... 2-12
Winter Driving ............................................. 4-23
Care of
Safety Belts .............................................. 5-112
CD, MP3 ....................................................... 3-72
Center Console Storage ................................... 2-42
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-48
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-78
Charging System Light .................................... 3-28
Check
Engine Lamp .............................................. 3-33
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-116
Child Restraints
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-33
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-41
Older Children ............................................. 1-30
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ................................... 1-47
Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-50
Systems ..................................................... 1-37
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-40
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-17
Circuit Breakers ............................................ 5-118
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-115
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................ 5-113
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-111
Finish Care ............................................... 5-114
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 5-112
Interior ..................................................... 5-110
Leather .................................................... 5-112
Tires ........................................................ 5-116
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-116
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-113
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-113
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 5-114
Climate Control System ................................... 3-18
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-21
Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-59
Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-26
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-13
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 5-109
Competitive Driving, Racing or Other ................. 4-19
Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant ............................ 5-80
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-16
3
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-4
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-42
Coolant
Engine ....................................................... 5-28
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-32
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-31
Cooling System .............................................. 5-26
Courtesy Transportation ................................... 7-11
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10
Cupholders .................................................... 2-42
Customer Assistance ......................................... 7-6
Offices ......................................................... 7-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ........................... 7-6
Customer Information
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-17
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ........................ 7-2
D
Damage Repair, Collision ................................. 7-13
Data Recorders
Event ......................................................... 7-18
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ......................... 3-13
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-10
Differential, Limited-Slip .................................... 4-15
Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 3-72
Display
Reconfigurable Performance .......................... 3-38
4
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-15
Door
Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-10
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10
Locks .......................................................... 2-8
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11
Driver
Seat Height Adjuster ...................................... 1-3
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-43
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-44
DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-52
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-46
Driver Storage Compartment ............................ 2-42
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-19
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-21
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunk .......................................................... 4-3
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-22
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-20
Loss of Control ........................................... 4-17
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 4-17
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-26
Winter ........................................................ 4-23
Driving for Better Fuel Economy ......................... 4-2
E
Easy Entry Seat ............................................... 1-8
EDR ............................................................. 7-18
Electrical Equipment
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-117
Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-120
Floor Console Fuse Block ........................... 5-119
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-118
Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 5-118
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-118
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-118
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-18
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-18
Electronic Stability Control ................................. 4-7
Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light ........... 3-31
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ................................. 5-21, 5-24
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ........... 3-33
Compartment Overview ................................ 5-12
Coolant ...................................................... 5-28
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-25
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-32
Cooling System ........................................... 5-26
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-15
Engine (cont.)
Exhaust .....................................................
Oil .............................................................
Oil Life System ...........................................
Overheating ................................................
Starting ......................................................
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Active Light .....
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Indicator/Warning Light .................................
Entry/Exit Lighting ...........................................
Event Data Recorders .....................................
Extender, Safety Belt .......................................
2-35
5-15
5-19
5-32
2-23
4-13
3-30
3-15
7-18
1-30
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner .............................. 5-21, 5-24
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-116
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-92
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-79
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-88
Flat Tire, Storing ........................................... 5-106
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-25
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-34
5
Fog Lamp
Fog ........................................................... 3-14
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-36
Folding Rear Seat ............................................ 1-9
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Economy Driving ........................................... 4-2
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-37
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-120
Floor Console Fuse Block ........................... 5-119
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-118
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-118
G
Gage
Speedometer ..............................................
Tachometer .................................................
Gages
Boost .........................................................
Fuel ..........................................................
6
3-25
3-25
3-38
3-37
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-6
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-42
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-7
H
Halogen Bulbs ................................................ 5-46
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-44
Headlamp Wiring ........................................... 5-118
Headlamps .................................................... 3-12
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-46
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ..................... 3-13
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-47
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
On Reminder .............................................. 3-13
Range Adjustment ......................................... 1-7
Wiper Activated ........................................... 3-13
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4
Heater ........................................................... 3-18
Engine Coolant ........................................... 2-25
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-3
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-37
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-22
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-15
Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-26
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-20
Indicator/Warning LIghts
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ................... 3-30
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-33
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-62
Instrument Panel
Brightness .................................................. 3-14
Cluster ....................................................... 3-24
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Introduction ...................................................... 6-2
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-39
K
Keyless Entry, Remote Operation ........................ 2-4
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamp
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
Lamps
Back-Up .....................................................
Daytime Running (DRL) ................................
Dome ........................................................
License Plate ..............................................
Mirror Reading ............................................
Taillamps and Turn Signal .............................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ...........................................
5-56
3-33
5-51
3-13
3-15
5-52
3-15
5-49
1-24
7
LATCH System for Child Restraints ................... 1-41
Lighting
Entry/Exit ................................................... 3-15
Lights ............................................................ 3-12
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-26
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............ 3-30
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-29
Charging System ......................................... 3-28
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-32
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Active ......... 4-13
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-36
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-37
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-36
On Reminder .............................................. 3-13
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-27
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-25
Security ..................................................... 3-36
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-32
Up-Shift ..................................................... 3-28
Limited-Slip Differential .................................... 4-15
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-26
Locks
Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-10
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10
Door ........................................................... 2-8
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11
8
Locks (cont.)
Power Door .................................................. 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-17
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ............. 1-41
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-3
M
Maintenance
Footnotes ..................................................... 6-7
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-14
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 3-33
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-3
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Manual Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-26
Operation ................................................... 2-28
Manual Windows ............................................ 2-15
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-46
Mirror Reading Lamps ..................................... 3-15
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-37
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-38
Outside Manual Mirror .................................. 2-37
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-38
Outside Remote Control Mirror ...................... 2-37
MP3 ............................................................. 3-72
N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-19
Net
Convenience ............................................... 2-42
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-20
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-25
Off-Road
Recovery .................................................... 4-17
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-15
Engine Oil Life System ................................. 5-19
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-36
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-30
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-5
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-19
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-39
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-21
Outlets
Accessory Power ......................................... 3-16
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-38
Manual Mirror ............................................. 2-37
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-38
Remote Control Mirror .................................. 2-37
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
9
P
Paint, Damage .............................................. 5-116
Park
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-32
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-33
Parking
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-34
Parking Brake ................................................ 2-31
Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-34
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-27
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-22
Passenger Sensing System ...................... 1-61, 1-67
Passing ......................................................... 4-17
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............... 2-18
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation ................................................... 2-18
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 5-4
Phone
Bluetooth® .................................................. 3-80
Power
Door Locks .................................................. 2-9
Electrical System ....................................... 5-118
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-23
Windows .................................................... 2-15
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts .......................... 1-29
10
Privacy .......................................................... 7-18
Navigation System ....................................... 7-19
OnStar ....................................................... 7-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ............. 7-19
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............... 2-10
Proposition 65 Warning, California ....................... 5-4
R
Racing or Other Competitive Driving .................. 4-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy ...... 7-19
Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-60
Radios
Reception ................................................... 3-91
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-59
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-90
Range Adjustment, Headlamps ........................... 1-7
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-11
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-37
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Reconfigurable Performance Display (RPD) ........ 3-38
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-32
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility ................. 7-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System, Operation ..... 2-4
Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 2-6
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ..................................... 5-94, 5-98
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-90
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-52
Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-14
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-16
General Motors ........................................... 7-16
United States Government ............................ 7-16
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-74
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-75
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-23
Ride Control Systems ....................................... 4-7
Electronic Stability (ESC) ................................ 4-7
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ................... 4-15
Roadside Assistance Program ............................ 7-8
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-26
Roof
Sunroof ...................................................... 2-43
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 2-36
S
Safety Belt Reminders ..................................... 3-25
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 5-112
Extender .................................................... 1-30
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-24
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-10
Use During Pregnancy ................................. 1-29
Safety Defects
Reporting to General Motors ......................... 7-16
Reporting to the Canadian Government .......... 7-16
Reporting to the United States Government ....... 7-16
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
Scheduling Appointments ................................. 7-10
Sealant Kit, Tire .............................................. 5-80
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ............................. 1-3
Easy Entry Seat ............................................ 1-8
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................. 1-9
11
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-47
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-50
Security Light ................................................. 3-36
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle ................................................ 5-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 3-33
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-17
Scheduling Appointments .............................. 7-10
Service Parts Identification Label ..................... 5-117
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-72
Setting the Clock ............................................ 3-59
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-116
Shifting
Out of Park ................................................ 2-33
Shifting Into Park ............................................ 2-32
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7
Spare Tire
Compact ................................................... 5-109
Installing ............................................ 5-94, 5-98
Removing ................................................... 5-90
Storing ..................................................... 5-106
Specifications and Capacities .......................... 5-124
Speedometer .................................................. 3-25
Split Folding Rear Seat ..................................... 1-9
Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 2-6
12
Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-23
Steering ........................................................ 4-15
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-90
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Storage Areas
Center Console ........................................... 2-42
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-42
Cupholders ................................................. 2-42
Driver Storage Compartment ......................... 2-42
Glove Box .................................................. 2-42
Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ...... 5-88
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-25
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-16
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-43
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-25
Taillamps
Turn Signal Lamps ...................................... 5-49
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...... 5-50
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-6
Theft-Deterrent Feature .................................... 3-90
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-16
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-16
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............ 2-18
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation ................................................ 2-18
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Time, Setting .................................................. 3-59
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-32
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ....................... 5-88
Tires ............................................................. 5-54
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ............................................... 5-115
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-72
Chains ....................................................... 5-78
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-88
Cleaning ................................................... 5-116
Compact Spare ......................................... 5-109
Different Size .............................................. 5-74
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-79
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-62
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-70
Installing the Spare Tire ....................... 5-94, 5-98
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-65
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-64
Removing the Flat Tire ......................... 5-94, 5-98
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-90
Sealant and Compressor Kit .......................... 5-80
Sidewall Labeling ......................................... 5-56
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools .......... 5-106
Terminology and Definitions ........................... 5-60
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-74
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-76
Tires (cont.)
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-76
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-71
Winter ........................................................ 5-55
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-32
Towing a Trailer .................................. 4-35, 4-41
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-32
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................. 4-10
Limited-Slip Differential ................................. 4-15
Traction Control System ................................... 3-31
Traction System
Enhanced ................................................... 3-30
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-25
Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-26
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-26
Transmission Operation, Manual ........................ 2-28
Transportation, Courtesy .................................. 7-11
Trunk ............................................................ 2-12
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-74
Up-Shift Light ................................................. 3-28
13
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-4
Loading ...................................................... 4-26
Parking Your ............................................... 2-34
Running While Parked .................................. 2-36
Symbols ......................................................... iii
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-18
Vehicle Data Recording,
Radio Frequency (RFID) ............................... 7-19
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-117
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-117
Vehicle Personalization
DIC ........................................................... 3-52
Vehicle, Remote Start ....................................... 2-6
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-21
Visors ........................................................... 2-16
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................... 5-71
Where to Put the Child Restraint ....................... 1-40
Windows ....................................................... 2-14
Manual ...................................................... 2-15
Power ........................................................ 2-15
Windshield
Washer ........................................................ 3-9
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-34
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-53
Wiper Blades, Cleaning .............................. 5-114
Wiper Fuses ............................................. 5-118
Wipers ......................................................... 3-8
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-23
Winter Tires ................................................... 5-55
Wiper Activated Headlamps .............................. 3-13
X
W
XM Radio Messages ....................................... 3-78
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-92
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-23
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-46
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-76
Different Size .............................................. 5-74
Replacement ............................................... 5-76
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
14
Y
Download PDF